Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
128i
135i
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
© 2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/11, 03 11 450
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The quickest way to find special topics is to
consult the index, refer to page 254.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Dashboard
16 iDrive
23 Voice activation system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
45 Adjustments
54 Transporting children safely
57 Driving
70 Controls overview
82 Technology for driving comfort and
safety
94 Lamps
99 Climate
104 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
116 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
124 Navigation system
125 Destination entry
134 Destination guidance
141 What to do if …
Entertainment
144 On/off and tone
147 Radio
150 Satellite radio
155 CD/DVD player and CD changer
161 Music collection
166 External devices
Communications
176 Telephone
188 Office
196 Contacts
198 ConnectedDrive
Mobility
206 Refueling
208 Wheels and tires
216 Under the hood
221 Maintenance
223 Care
227 Replacing components
234 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
242 Technical data
247 Short commands for the voice activation
system
254 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehi-
cle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional accessories, as
well as equipment and functions not yet avail-
able at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
* to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle per-
formed only by your BMW center or at a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair pro-
cedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of accessories not
approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Notes
6
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable warranty
limitations or exclusions for such country or
region. In such case, please contact Customer
Relations for further information.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance mea-
sures:
> BMW Maintenance system
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your center, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-
phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Dashboard
10
Dashboard
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Convertible: opening and closing
windows jointly 38
2 Convertible: opening and closing
rear windows 38
3 Opening and closing front
windows 37
4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out
* 51
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor
* 51
6
Parking lamps 94
Low beams 95
Automatic headlamp control
* 94
Adaptive Light Control
* 95
High-beam Assistant
* 96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
7
Fog lamps
* 97
8
Turn signals 66
High beams, headlamp flasher 96
High-beam Assistant
* 96
Roadside parking lamps
* 96
Computer 71
Settings and information about the
vehicle 73
9 Instrument cluster 12
10
Windshield wipers 67
Rain sensor
* 67
11 Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 57
12 Ignition lock 57
13 Buttons
on the steering wheel
Telephone
*:
Accepting and ending a call; dial-
ing
* the selected phone number;
redialing if no phone number is
selected
Volume
Activating/deactivating the voice
activation system
*
Changing the radio station
Interrupting a traffic bulletin
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Next entertainment source
Recirculated air mode 101
14
Steering wheel heating
* 53
15 Horn, entire surface
16 Adjusting the steering wheel 52
17
Cruise control
* 68
18 Releasing the hood 216
19 OBD socket 222
20 Opening the trunk lid 33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Dashboard
12
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
135i: with fuel gauge
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Tachometer 70
5 Fuel gauge 71
135i: engine oil temperature 71
6 Display for
> Clock 70
> Outside temperature 70
> Indicator and warning lamps 78
7 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission
* 59
> Gear indicator in 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch
* 62
> Computer 71
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 74
> Odometer and trip odometer 70
> High-beam Assistant
* 96
> Checking the oil level 217
> Settings and information 73
8 Resetting the trip odometer 70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
You can call up more information on the Control
Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and
on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to
page 78.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
High beams/headlamp flasher 96
Fog lamps
* 97
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-
sive forces in order to maintain driving
stability 84
Canada: parking brake applied 59
Parking brake applied 59
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on emissions 222
Engine malfunction with adverse
effect on emissions 222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Dashboard
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Coupe: microphone for voice activation
system
* and for telephone* in hands-free
mode
Convertible: microphone on steering col-
umn
2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request
call
* 234
3 Reading lamps
* 98
4 Coupe: glass roof, electric
* 39
5 Interior lamps 98
6 Passenger airbag status lamp 91
7 Control Display 16
8 Driving stability control systems
> Dynamic Stability Control DSC 83
> Dynamic Traction Control DTC 84
9 Hazard warning flashers
10 Central locking system 32
11 Automatic climate control
12 CD/DVD drive
* 144
13 Selecting AM or FM waveband
14 Changing the audio and entertainment
sources
15 Changing
> Radio station 147
> Track 155
17 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
18 Buttons on the controller 17
Selecting menus directly
19 Programmable memory keys 21
20 Switching entertainment audio sources on/
off and adjusting volume 144
21 Ejecting a CD/DVD
* 155
Air distribution to the
windshield 100
Air distribution to the upper body
area 100
Air distribution to the footwell 100
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 100
Cooling function 101
Automatic recirculated air control
AUC and recirculated air
mode 101
Maximum cooling 100
ALL program 101
Air volume 101
Defrosting windows 101
Rear window defroster 101
Heated seats
* 50
16
Convertible: open convertible
top 41
Convertible: closing the convertible
top 41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
The concept
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num-
ber of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions permit; otherwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users by being distracted.<
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Move in four directions, arrows 3
> Turn, arrow 4
> Push, arrow 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Control Display
Notes
> Follow care instructions when cleaning the
Control Display.
> Do not store items in the region in front of
the Control Display; doing so may damage
the Control Display.
Switching off
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller to switch on.
Buttons on the controller
Operating principle
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
refer to page 57, the following message is dis-
played on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Symbol Function
MENU Open the main menu
RADIO Open the Radio menu
CD Open the CD/Multimedia menu
NAV Start navigation in map view
TEL Open the Telephone menu
BACK Show previous panel
OPTION Open the Options menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that
should be selected are depicted in quotation
marks, e.g. "Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g. "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
> Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ-
ous panel is displayed.
Pressing the BACK button reopens the pre-
vious panel. This does not close the current
panel.
> Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened and laid over it.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi-
cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When you open a menu, generally the panel last
selected in this menu is displayed. To display
the first panel of the menu:
> Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
> Press the menu's button twice on the con-
troller.
Open the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Another possibility: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
Options menu
The "Options" menu is composed of different
areas:
> Screen settings, e.g. "Split screen".
The region remains unchanged.
> Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g. "Radio".
> Other control options for the selected
menu, e.g. "Store station".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
Activating/deactivating functions
Some menu items are preceded by a check box.
It indicates whether the function is activated or
deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates
or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status box
The status box at the top right displays the fol-
lowing information:
> Time
> Current entertainment source
> Sound output ON/OFF
> Mobile phone network with strongest
reception
> Telephone status
> Traffic reports reception
Status box symbols
The symbols are divided into separate groups.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Radio symbols
Telephone symbols
Entertainment symbols
Other
With the Professional
navigation system:
Split screen
General information
Additional information, e.g. from the computer,
can be displayed on the right side of the split
screen.
This information remains visible on the split
screen even when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting display
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Symbol Meaning
Traffic bulletins
* switched on
HD radio
* switched on
Satellite radio
* switched on
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call
*
Missed call*
Reception strength of mobile
phone network
*
symbol flashing: network search
No mobile phone network avail-
able
*
Bluetooth* switched on
Roaming
* active
Receiving text message
*, email*
Checking SIM card*
SIM card* blocked
SIM card
* missing
Entering PIN
*
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD
* player
Music collection*
Gracenote® database*
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface*
Mobile phone audio interface*
Symbol Meaning
Voice instructions
* switched off
Query current vehicle position
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Programmable memory keys
General information
iDrive functions can be stored on the program-
mable memory keys and called up directly, e.g.
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and entry points into the menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Storing functions
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button ...
for longer than two seconds.
Executing a function
Press the ... button.
The function is executed immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying memory key assignments
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
> Displaying brief information: press the but-
ton.
> Displaying detailed information: press and
hold the button.
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm entry.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Switching between uppercase and
lowercase letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering uppercase letters and lower-
case letters:
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete
one letter or number
Press the controller for an
extended period: delete all
letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
Symbol Function
Move the controller toward
the front: to switch from
uppercase letters to lower-
case letters
Move the controller toward
the front: to switch from low-
ercase letters to uppercase
letters
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
iDrive
22
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
> During entry, only letters for which there are
data are offered.
> Destination search: town/city names can be
entered with the spelling used in any of the
languages available on the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Voice activation system
The concept
> The voice activation system can be used to
control functions by spoken commands.
> Functions that can only used when the vehi-
cle is stopped cannot be operated using the
voice activation system.
> The system includes a special microphone
on the driver's side.
> In the Owner's Manual, {...} indicates com-
mands for the voice activation system.
> In the Owner's Manual, {{...}} indicates the
answers from the voice activation system.
Prerequisite
On the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
to permit identification of the commands to be
spoken.
Setting the language, refer to page 81.
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the acoustic signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol on the Control Display and an
acoustic signal notify you that the voice activa-
tion system is activated.
If no additional commands are possible, con-
tinue by operating the function via iDrive.
Finishing voice input
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands.
The available commands depend on which
menu is currently selected on the Control Dis-
play.
There are short commands for functions of the
main menu.
Some list entries, e.g. phone book entries
*, can
likewise be selected using the voice activation
system. Make sure to say list entries the same
way as they appear in the respective list.
Having the possible commands read
aloud
To have the available commands read aloud:
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis-
played, the commands relating to settings are
read aloud.
Performing functions using short
commands
Functions from the main menu can be per-
formed directly by means of short commands,
regardless of which menu item is selected, e.g.
{Vehicle status}.
List of short command of the voice activation
system, refer to page 247.
*
{Cancel}
{Voice commands}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Voice activation system
24
Help dialog for voice activation system
Accessing help:
Other commands
* for the help dialog:
> {Help with examples}: information about
the current control options and the most
important commands relating to them are
read aloud.
> {Help with voice activation}: information
about the principle operation of the voice
activation system is read aloud.
Example: playing back a CD
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
4. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system uses the stan-
dard dialog or a short version.
In the short version of the voice dialog, the
responses from the system are given in abbre-
viated form.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting.
Adjusting volume
Turn the volume knob during the spoken
instruction to select the desired volume.
> The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini-
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button
*, refer to
page 234, in the vicinity of the interior rearview
mirror.
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha-
sis and speed.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice activation system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
{Help}
3. {C D and multimedia}
The system plays the last media played.
5. {C D track …} e.g. CD track 4.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
At a glance
25
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof*/pan-
oramic glass roof
* closed to prevent inter-
ference from ambient noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Opening and closing
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort
Access
*, the remote control contains a
replaceable battery, refer to page 37.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-
sonal Profile, next column.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 221.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
> Convertible: glove compartment, refer to
page 107
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote con-
trols with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-
file ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the set-
tings stored for it are called up and imple-
mented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi-
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if Comfort Access
* is in
use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Programming the Programmable memory
keys, refer to page 21
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 32
> Automatic call-up
* of the driver's seat posi-
tion, refer to page 50
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Settings for the display on the Control Dis-
play and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 76
> Date format, refer to page 78
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 81
> Language of the Control Display, refer to
page 81
> Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 74
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC, refer to page 82
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 94
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 95
> Daytime running lights, refer to page 95
> High-beam Assistant
*, refer to page 96
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac-
tivating AUTO program, cooling function
and automatic recirculated air control, set-
ting temperature, air volume and distribu-
tion, refer to page 100 ff
> Entertainment:
> Tone control, refer to page 144
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 144
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Trunk lid
> Fuel filler flap
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
*
> In cars with Comfort Access*, via the han-
dles on the driver's and front passenger
doors
In addition, if the remote control is used, the
welcome lamps
*, interior lamps and the door's
courtesy lamps
* are switched on or off. The
alarm system
* is also armed or disarmed.
For further details on the alarm system
*, refer
to page 34.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 32.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Convertible: to operate the convertible
top with the remote control, the doors and
trunk lid must be closed and the cargo area par-
tition must be folded down and engaged on
both sides. Refer also to page 42.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
* and the
welcome lamps come on.
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Pressing the button once unlocks
the driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
5. Press the controller.
Coupe: convenient opening
Press and hold the button.
The windows and the glass roof
* are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening*
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to open
the convertible top and windows.
Hold the button down.
The windows and the convertible top
are
opened provided that the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the win-
dows move up.
Watch during the opening process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Convertible: convenient closing*
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to
close the convertible top and windows.
Press and hold the button.
The convertible top and the windows are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the trunk lid
Press the button for about 1 second and
then release it.
The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless
of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The trunk lid swings backward and up
when opened. Make sure that adequate
clearance is available before opening.
To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do
not place the remote control in the cargo area.
A previously locked trunk lid is locked again
after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the trunk
lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the controller.
Calling up the driver's seat position
The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select whether or not the seat is reset
to that position automatically.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted when you
touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the
memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Coupe: in vehicles without an alarm system
* or
Comfort Access
*, only the driver's door can be
unlocked and locked using the integrated key in
the door lock.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 28. The remote control for Comfort
Access contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 37.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is
unlocked, refer to page 29.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Coupe
In vehicles without an alarm system* or
Comfort Access
*, only the driver's door
can be locked via the door lock.<
To lock both doors, the fuel filler flap and the
trunk lid together:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle
using the button for the central locking sys-
tem in the interior, refer to page 32.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas-
senger door, refer to page 33.
3. Lock the vehicle.
> Lock the driver's door using the inte-
grated key in the door lock, or
> press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
Convenient opening and closing*
Coupe: if the vehicle is equipped with an alarm
system
* or Comfort Access*, you can also
operate the windows and glass roof
* via the
door lock.
Convertible: you can operate the windows and
convertible top via the door lock.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
During each closing procedure, and when
opening the convertible top, watch the
process and ensure that no one becomes
trapped. Releasing the key stops the opera-
tion.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-
tions in the door lock.
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after a short time if
no door has been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Trunk lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
trunk lid.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it
has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button
on the remote control for a longer period. The
trunk lid opens slightly and can be swung
upward.
In the event of a malfunction, please con-
tact your BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.<
Locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the trunk lid
2 Unlocking the trunk lid
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked
using the central locking system.
If you give the remote control without the inte-
grated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened. This is an advantage when valet park-
ing, for example. Locking the glove compart-
ment, refer to page 107.
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo area. The trunk lid is
unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
trunk lid make it easier to pull down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.<
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is
opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: interior
motion sensor, refer to page 35
> When the car's inclination changes, e.g.
if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal
the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away:
tilt alarm sensor, refer to page 35
> When there has been an interruption of
power supply from the battery
Depending on the market-specific version, the
alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry
attempts by:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on
* the hazard warning flashers
Arming and disarming
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the trunk lid using the button
of the remote control even if the alarm system is
armed, refer to page 30. The lid is locked and
monitored again as soon as it is closed.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 29, or
> insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the inside rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood or trunk lid are not properly
closed. Even if you do not close the alerted
area, the system begins to monitor the
remaining areas, and the indicator lamp
flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and
the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed
while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass roof
* must
be completely closed.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. This way, the anti-
theft alarm system including the interior motion
sensor are armed, even if the convertible top is
open. Falling objects, e.g. tree leaves, may trig-
ger a false alarm, refer to Avoiding false alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort Access*
Comfort Access enables you to enter your vehi-
cle without needing to hold the remote control
in your hand. All you need to do is wear the
remote control close to your body, e.g. in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre-
sponding remote control within the immediate
vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the trunk lid separately
> Engine starting
> Convenient closing
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the trunk lid can only be
locked when the vehicle detects that the
remote control currently in use is outside of
the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control cur-
rently in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
In general, there is no difference between using
Comfort Access or pressing the buttons on the
remote control to carry out the functions men-
tioned above. You should therefore first famil-
iarize yourself with the instructions on opening
and closing starting on page 28.
Special features regarding the use of Comfort
Access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows, the glass roof or the
convertible top, the system is checking whether
a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please
repeat the opening or closing procedure, if nec-
essary.<
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas-
senger door completely, arrow 1. This corre-
sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for
approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closing
For Convenient closing, keep your finger on the
surface, arrow 2.
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
you can open and close the windows and the
convertible top when a remote control is
located inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle after the trunk lid is closed, the
lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers
flash and a signal
* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the
Start/Stop button, refer to page 57.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch;
otherwise, the engine will start immedi-
ately.<
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle.
It is not necessary to insert a remote control into
the ignition lock, refer to page 57.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission*
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 58.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Malfunctions
Comfort Access may malfunction due to local
radio waves. If this happens, open and close the
vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or
using the integrated key. To start the engine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
afterward, insert the remote control into the
ignition lock.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote
control with you inside the vehicle or have it
checked. If necessary, insert another remote
control into the ignition lock.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 28.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a recycling center
or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control out of the ignition
when you leave the car; otherwise, children
could operate the electric windows and possi-
bly injure themselves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Window operation with Comfort Access, refer
also to page 30.
To close the side windows while driving,
either close the rear windows first or all
four windows together; otherwise, the windows
may not close tightly at high speeds.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Individually
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot
be closed automatically.
Jointly
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
All windows open as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
> Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the
switch.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door has been opened.
Convenient opening and closing
For information on Convenient opening and
closing via the remote control or the door lock,
refer to page 29 or 32. For information on Con-
venient closing with Comfort Access, refer to
Locking on page 36.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
power window closes, the closing action is
interrupted and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise, the
pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them
closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-
dows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Coupe: glass roof*, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Tilting
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is tilted and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with
the roof in the tilted position, as this would
damage the mechanism.<
Opening, closing
> Press the switch backwards to the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
> Press the switch backwards past the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on Convenient opening and
closing via the remote control or the door lock,
refer to page 29 or 32. For information on Con-
venient closing with Comfort Access, refer to
Locking on page 36.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the tilted position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it
there. The roof closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be tilted. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
Closing manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227.
2. On both sides, use the screwdriver to press
on the clip inside the opening.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench
* supplied with the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227,
into the opening provided. Move the glass
roof in the desired direction.
6. Reattach the lamp cover and reinstall the
control unit.
Convertible: convertible top
The fully automatic top combines reliable
weather protection with simple and easy-to-
use operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving
pleasure in your Convertible:
> It is recommended that you close the con-
vertible top whenever the vehicle is parked.
The closed convertible top not only pro-
tects the vehicle interior from damage due
to unforeseen bad weather, but also pro-
vides a certain degree of protection against
theft. However, even when the top is
closed, valuables should only be stored in
the locked cargo area.
> Do not mount any roof rack systems on the
convertible top.
> If the top is opened while it is wet, e.g. after
driving in the rain, water may drip into the
cargo area. If necessary, remove items from
the cargo area beforehand to avoid water
stains or soiling.
At temperatures below +147/–106, do
not move the convertible top as this could
result in damage.
Do not keep the convertible top in the convert-
ible top box for longer than one day if it is wet;
otherwise, the moisture may cause damage.
Do not place objects on the convertible top, as
otherwise they may fall off when you operate
the convertible top and cause damage or injury.
Never move the convertible top when the roll-
over protection system is in the activated posi-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
tion.
Always completely finish the operation of the
convertible top. Driving with the convertible top
incompletely opened or closed can result in
damage or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism during the
opening or closing procedure. Keep children
away from the opening/closing path of the con-
vertible top.
For safety reasons, only operate the convertible
top while the vehicle is standing.<
While opening and closing, the convert-
ible top pivots upward. When operating
the convertible top in a garage, under a bridge,
etc., ensure that there are at least 6 ft 7 in/2 m
of headroom; otherwise, the vehicle may be
damaged.<
Before opening and closing
> Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
> Ensure that the cargo area partition is
folded down and engaged on both sides,
refer to page 110; otherwise, it will not be
possible to open the convertible top.
> Ensure that the cargo does not press
against the cargo area partition from below.
> Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.
Opening and closing
Convertible top operation with Comfort Access,
refer also to page 30.
As of radio readiness, refer to page 57:
To conserve battery power, if possible
operate the convertible top only while the
engine is running.
Prior to closing the convertible top, check for
and remove all debris from the windshield
frame; otherwise, the closing of the top may be
hampered.<
1 Push button: closing the convertible top
2 Push button: open convertible top
3 LEDs
The side windows move down when the
convertible top is opened.<
Operating while driving
You can open or close the convertible top while
driving, as long as the car is not moving faster
than approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
If you accelerate to over 30 mph/50 km/h while
the convertible top is moving, the procedure is
interrupted.
While operating the convertible top, pay
close attention to the surrounding traffic;
otherwise, an accident may happen. Try to
avoid operating the convertible top while
reversing the vehicle since the rear view is very
limited during the convertible top's movement.
Do not operate the convertible top while driving
in windy conditions. Do not drive faster than
30 mph/50 km/h; otherwise, damage to the
vehicle can occur.<
LEDs
> While the convertible top is being operated,
the left LED lights up green. It goes out as
soon as the top is fully opened or closed.
In the following situations, a message appears
on the Control Display or an acoustic signal
sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you
release the button, the opening or closing
action has not yet finished.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
> If the right-hand LED lights up red when the
button is pressed, the cargo area partition is
raised, the trunk lid is not closed or there is a
malfunction. The convertible top cannot be
moved.
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the button for the convertible top
operation is released. The sequence can be
continued in the desired direction by pushing or
pulling the buttons.
If the opening or closing procedure is inter-
rupted for an extended period, the convertible
top remains in the raised position for approx.
10 minutes and then slowly moves to a stable
position.
A convertible top which is not completely
open or closed is hazardous.<
If the convertible top is not fully opened or
closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened
and the windows cannot be moved.<
Convenient opening and closing with
remote control or via door lock
Refer to pages 30 and 32.
Closing manually
Only close the convertible top manually if
it is absolutely necessary. Never open it
manually. The convertible top box cover cannot
be locked if there is an electrical defect and
would then open while the vehicle is in motion.
Incorrect handling can result in damage.<
Closing the convertible top manually should be
performed by two people. The rear seats must
not be occupied.
Before closing
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Take the screwdriver out of the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227.
3. If the convertible top is locked, release the
two button in the cargo area, arrows 1,
using the screwdriver and pull forcefully all
the way out. The convertible top box cover
is unlocked.
4. Close the trunk lid. After manually releasing
the convertible top box cover, it is no longer
possible to open the trunk lid.
Closing
1. Slide the protective cap, arrow 2, forward.
2. Slowly and smoothly open the convertible
top box cover all the way, arrow 3.
3. The locking pins must have engaged com-
pletely. If they are still visible: close the con-
vertible top box cover as far as necessary
until the locking bolts engage audibly, then
slowly open the cover. During this process,
do not close the convertible top box cover
completely.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Lift out the front part of the convertible top,
arrows 4, on both sides and swing it for-
ward. At the same time keep the convertible
top box cover from closing, e.g. using your
shoulder.
5. Position the rear convertible top frame
upright, arrow 5, and close the convertible
top box cover, arrow 6. Then lower the rear
convertible top frame.
6. Together with another person, press down
the front convertible top frame from the out-
side and on both sides as far as possible.
7. Carefully remove the cover in the center of
the front convertible top frame using a
pointed object.
Take the Allen wrench out of the onboard
literature pouch.
8. Attach the handle of the screwdriver to the
Allen wrench and insert the wrench into the
opening provided.
9. Turn the Allen wrench all the way to the left,
arrow 7, until the front convertible top frame
is locked to the windshield frame. The rear
convertible top frame is automatically
pressed down onto the convertible top box
cover and is sealed tight under tension.
The closing procedure must be fully com-
pleted; otherwise, injury or damage may
occur.<
Please contact your BMW center to have the
cause of the malfunction eliminated.
Wind deflector*
With the convertible top open, the wind deflec-
tor keeps air movement in the passenger com-
partment to a minimum, thus providing you with
a more pleasant drive, even at higher speeds.
Installation
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of
the wind deflector until the catch engages,
arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Opening and closing
44
3. Position both locking pins of one side at the
openings provided for them.
4. Press the wind deflector into the openings,
arrows 3, overcoming the tension in the
springs, and push the free locking pin in the
same direction, arrow 4.
5. Position the free locking pins at the corre-
sponding openings and let the spring ten-
sion lock the wind deflector in place,
arrow 5.
6. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec-
tor, arrow 6.
With the wind deflector installed: do not
recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this
would damage the wind deflector.<
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal-
lation.
Folding
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of
the wind deflector and push the two halves
apart.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 54.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
i.e. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard;
otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front air-
bag deploys.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise,
serious injuries can result if the airbag
deploys.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 90.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 48.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-
wise, the belt could slide over your hips and
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and reg-
ularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut;
otherwise, its restraining effect could be
impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 50.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a
danger in the event of an accident of sliding
under the safety belt, eliminating the protection
normally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 48, and on damaged safety
belts on page 51.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Tilt*
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
ward or back.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Electrical adjustment*
Observe the adjustment instructions
above to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer
to Head restraints on page 48.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
ingly.
Longitudinal adjustment from outside/
behind*
To move the front seats forward or backward
from outside or from one of the rear seats: with
the door open, press the front end 1 or rear
end 2 of the switch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Only remove a head
restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in
question. Reinstall the head restraint before
transporting anyone on that seat; otherwise, the
passenger will be without protection from the
head restraint.<
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Rear seats
Coupe: height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Convertible: raising and lowering
Only lower the head restraints if there are
no passengers in the rear. Raise all low-
ered head restraints before transporting pas-
sengers in the rear.<
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down, arrow 2.
Removing
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Coupe: folding head restraint down and
up*
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may
contain foldable head restraints.
Folding down:
Press the button, arrow 1.
Folding up:
Pull the head restraint.
Only fold down the head restraints if there
are no passengers in the rear. Fold up the
head restraints again before transporting pas-
sengers in the rear.<
Seat with manual longitudinal
adjustment
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory func-
tion for the longitudinal adjustment and back-
rest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.
Previous position
Push the seat backward and swing the backrest
back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost
position, make sure that no one is injured
and that no objects are damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Other-
wise, there is a risk of an accident due to unex-
pected movement.<
Seat with electrical longitudinal
adjustment
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory func-
tion for the longitudinal adjustment and back-
rest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the
seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat
automatically stops in its previous position, and
fold the backrest back. If you release the switch
before the previous seat position is reached,
the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make
sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Other-
wise, there is a risk of an accident due to unex-
pected movement.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
Heated seats*
Press the button once per temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx. the next
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory*
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-
tions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup-
port are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 57.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
the LED goes out.
Call-up
Do not call up the memory while you are
driving; otherwise, unexpected seat
movement could result in an accident.<
Comfort function
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted when you
touch a seat adjustment switch or one of
the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 57.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 45 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, refer to page 46.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for front seats
The indicator lamps light up and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-
tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also
issued above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h if the front
passenger safety belt has not been fastened, if
there are objects on the front passenger seat or
if the driver or front passenger unfasten their
safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work done only by
your BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is
not guaranteed that the safety devices will func-
tion properly.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of an acci-
dent.<
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic
curb monitor
*
3 Folding mirrors in and out*
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use
*. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by
pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in nar-
row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors
that were folded in by hand back out into their
correct positions. Mirrors that have been folded
in fold out automatically at a speed of approx.
24 mph/40 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Adjustments
52
Automatic heating
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Passenger-side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Shift into reverse or move the selector lever
into the R position.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-
lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors
* is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there
is a risk of an accident due to unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise, the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Steering wheel heating*
Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up when the steer-
ing wheel heating is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
54
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
Children should always sit in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Children in the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to page 91.
Installing child restraint
systems
Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the protective effect may be dimin-
ished. <
Standard child restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passenger
seat must be at its widest possible set-
ting. Do not change the setting after installing
the child seat; otherwise, the child seat's stabil-
ity on the front passenger seat is limited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set-
ting, refer to page 47.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child restraint systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system; otherwise, the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest; otherwise, the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
Coupe: rear seats
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located behind the labeled protec-
tive caps.
Convertible: rear seats
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located at the positions indicated
by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the
backrest.
Upper LATCH retaining strap
Convertible
For Canadian Customers Only.
The following statement is required by Trans-
port Canada.
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child
restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir-
ing the use of a tether strap can be properly
secured in the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
56
Coupe
Use the top tether anchors to secure child
restraint systems only; otherwise, the
anchors could be damaged.<
For child restraint systems with tether straps
there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Coupe
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise, the strap will not properly secure the child
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys-
tem
If necessary, fold the head restraints upward
before use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Comfort Access*
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only
insert the remote control into the ignition lock
under special circumstances, refer to page 35.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission*
You cannot take out the remote control unless
the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
Manual transmission: if you press the
Start/Stop button and depress the clutch,
the engine starts.
Automatic transmission and Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch: if you press
the Start/Stop button and depress the brake
pedal, the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with Comfort Access
*, by touching
the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 36
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off
the ignition and any unnecessary electri-
cal consumers in order to preserve the bat-
tery.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving
58
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis-
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in enclosed areas;
otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause loss of consciousness and
death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly
toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle
with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehi-
cle represents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
place the transmission in neutral or move the
selector lever to position P and forcefully apply
the parking brake to prevent the car from mov-
ing.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated start attempts in which
the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is
not burned or incompletely burned and there is
a danger of overheating and damaging the cat-
alytic converter.<
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 35.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift into neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 35.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 35.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine starts independent of the current
transmission position.
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 57.
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-
tor lever to position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 57.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
If the transmission is shifted into N when the
engine is switched off, you will be notified
visually and acoustically of this fact.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
3. Remove remote control from the ignition
lock, refer to page 57. The transmission is
automatically shifted into transmission
position P.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off a signal sounds in addition.
The parking brake is still applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 61.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving
60
Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
interlock. Removing the remote control from
the ignition lock, refer to page 57.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is displayed and, in
manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag-
ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the lock, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The transmission locks to prevent the drive
wheels from turning.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con-
sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi-
tion D.
Kickdown
Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Sport program and manual operation
M/S
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program
is activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
To deactivate the sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the
steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears
quickly since both hands can remain on the
steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear
plane, manual mode remains active.<
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift pad-
dle –.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Overriding selector lever lock
If the selector lever will not move out of
position P even though the ignition is switched
on, the brake is depressed, and the button on
the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever
lock can be overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving
62
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227, press the
red lever, see arrow, while moving the
selector lever to the desired position.
7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch*
The concept
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch is an automated manual trans-
mission with two clutches and secondary gear
sets in which the clutching and shifting is han-
dled by an electrohydraulic system.
With the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch, the gears are shifted without
an interruption in driving power.
You operate the 7-gear Sport automatic trans-
mission with double clutch using the selector
lever and two shift paddles on the steering
wheel.
It offers you the following functions:
> Either manual or automatic mode: sequen-
tial mode or drive mode
> Automatic downshifting and protection
against incorrect gear selection, even in
sequential mode
> Acceleration assistant, Launch Control,
refer to page 66
> Automatic intermediate throttle application
System limitations
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch has an overheating protection
that protects the clutch from extreme loads.
The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if
the transmission becomes too warm.
Avoid high engine loads and frequent
accelerations from zero. If the transmission is
overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red
and the power flow to the motor is interrupted. It
is only possible to continue driving once the
transmission has cooled down.
Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from
zero and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by
pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting
the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmis-
sion to overheat.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
The selector lever position and the engaged
gear are displayed, e.g. M4.
Engaging selector lever positions
> The selector lever can be moved out of
position P only with the engine running:
interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not
be executed: shiftlock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Shifting into N, D, R
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired
direction, overcoming a resistance point if nec-
essary. When shifting out of P or into R, simul-
taneously press the button 1.
The engaged selector lever position is also dis-
played on the selector lever.
When you release the selector lever, it returns
to its center position.
Shifting into P
Press the button P.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
The transmission is shifted into P if, with
the engine running, you open the driver's
door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and
subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal
nor the accelerator. Before leaving the vehicle,
make sure that the automatic transmission
selector lever is in the park position. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move.<
The transmission is shifted into P as soon
as you switch off the engine, unless the
transmission is in N and the remote control is in
the ignition lock, refer to page 57. As soon as
you remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.<
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
After the engine is switched off, the trans-
mission remains in N if you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. You can use
this function at a car wash, for example, refer to
page 224.<
D Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Kickdown
For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as
passing, depress the accelerator past the resis-
tance point. This provides maximum accelera-
tion.
Sport program and manual operation
M/S
Push selector lever toward the left from the
selector lever position D, the Sport program is
activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving
64
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In the following situations, the 7-gear Sport
automatic transmission with double clutch
does the thinking for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that could cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> At a stop, the transmission is automatically
shifted down to the first gear.
> Shortly before the speed falls below a gear-
dependent minimum speed, the transmis-
sion automatically downshifts without your
intervention.
Quick downshifting: even in sequential mode,
you can skip over several gears in order to
achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so,
depress the accelerator past the resistance
point.
To return to automatic mode, push the selector
lever to the right.
Gear shifting
Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or
the shift paddles. You do not need to lift your
foot off the accelerator when doing so.
Using the selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the
rear.
> To downshift, push it toward the front.
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
You can also shift manually using two shift pad-
dles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles
allow you to shift gears quickly since both
hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode if the selector lever is in
position D.
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift pad-
dle –.
Driving dynamics control
The driving dynamics control permits you, at
the push of a button, to have your BMW react in
an even more sporty fashion when driving:
> Optimal use is made of the engine's speed
range.
> Gear changes occur more quickly.
> The engine reacts more spontaneously to
accelerator pedal movements.
Activating the system
Press the SPORT button.
The LED in the button lights up.
Deactivating the system
> Press the SPORT button again
> Switch off the engine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The LED in the button goes out.
Manually unlocking parking lock
In the event of a power supply interrup-
tion such as a discharged or discon-
nected battery or an electrical malfunction, the
parking lock must be manually unlocked; other-
wise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the
vehicle cannot be towed.<
Only unlock the parking lock manually for tow-
ing and make sure to set the parking brake
forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot
roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle
is parked.
Releasing
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Using the allen wrench from the tool kit,
refer to page 227, rotate the cover until it
reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove,
arrow 2.
4. Insert allen wrench into the opening,
arrow 1.
5. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the
stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked.
Do not turn allen wrench in the oppo-
site direction; otherwise, you may
damage the mechanism.<
6. Remove allen wrench from the opening.
After parking the vehicle, lock the parking
lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger
that the vehicle will roll.<
Locking
1. Press the button, see arrow.
The parking lock is locked again.
2. Replace cover again.
3. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into
place.
4. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Jump-starting and towing, starting on
page 235.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving
66
Launch Control
Launch Control enables an optimum accelera-
tion when starting off on a road surface with
good traction.
Do not use Launch Control too often; oth-
erwise, the powerful stresses on the vehi-
cle will lead to premature component wear.<
Launch Control is ready for use when the
engine is at operating temperature, i.e. after
uninterrupted travel of at least 6.2 miles/10 km.
1. With the engine running, step on the brake
with your left foot.
2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC),
refer to page 84.
3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to
page 64.
4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the
manual mode and select 1
st
gear.
5. With your right foot, push the accelerator
pedal past the resistance point. The engine
speed for pulling away is adjusted. A flag
symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehi-
cle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal
floored.
7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long
as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed
past the resistance point.
Launch Control will be ready for use again after
you drive a certain distance.
Launch Control is not available for use during
the break-in phase, refer to page 116.
To maintain driving stability, keep DSC
activated whenever possible.<
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp and the turn signals indicates that
one of the turn signal bulbs has failed.<
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to signal a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter-
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumb wheel 5.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-
ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage
the washer pump.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving
68
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
automatically
* while the engine is running or
the ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid is flammable. Therefore,
keep it away from ignition sources and
only store it in the closed original container that
is kept out of reach of children; otherwise, there
is a risk of personal injury. Comply with the
instructions on the container.<
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
You can use the cruise control feature begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The car then
stores and maintains the speed that you specify
using the lever on the steering column.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat-
ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler-
ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a previously stored speed
Maintaining current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly,
arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is briefly displayed in the instrument
cluster.
If the engine braking power is insufficient on a
downhill slope, the set speed may be exceeded.
On uphill grades vehicle speed may drop if the
engine output is insufficient.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Increasing speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
Each time the lever is pressed briefly, the speed
is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
Accelerating using the lever
Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed
is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever, arrow 2, until the
desired speed is reached.
The functions here are the same as for increas-
ing the speed or accelerating, except that the
speed will be decreased.
Deactivating cruise control
Push the lever briefly upwards or downwards,
arrow 3.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When the brakes are applied.
> When the clutch of the manual transmission
is engaged or the transmission is shifted
into neutral.
> When the automatic transmission selector
lever is moved into the neutral position N.
> When the selector lever of the Sports auto-
matic transmission with double clutch is
moved into the neutral position N.
> When the vehicle travels faster or slower
than the set speed for an extended period,
e.g. when the accelerator is depressed.
> When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti-
vated.
> When DSC is intervening
Resuming a previously stored speed
Press the button, arrow 4.
The last stored speed is resumed and main-
tained.
The stored speed is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster.
The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is
switched off.
Display in the instrument cluster
When the speed at which the vehicle is traveling
is stored or when a stored speed is called up,
the speed is briefly displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
70
Controls overview
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to Units of mea-
sure on page 74.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 76.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature falls to approx.
+377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning
lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of
black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +377/+36. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Engine oil temperature*
When the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/
1506.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 14 US gal/53 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 206.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Fuel display 135i: in speedometer.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the remaining cruising range is dis-
played on the computer. Under a cruising range
of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message
appears continuously in the Control Display.
With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid corner-
ing, engine functions are not always assured.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn signal/high beam
lever.
The following items of information are dis-
played in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
> No information
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Units of measure on page 74.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
72
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
It is important that you refuel as soon as
possible once your cruising range falls
below 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine func-
tions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, refer to page 73, you
can have the average speed for another trip dis-
played.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn signal/high beam lever for approx.
2seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
With the trip computer, refer to page 73, you
can have the average consumption for another
trip displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn signal/high beam lever for
approx. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Displays on the Control Display
The computer can also be opened via iDrive.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displaying "Onboard info":
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival if a destination has
been entered in the navigation system
*,
refer to page 125.
Displaying "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> The average speed and
> the average fuel consumption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu entry.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Resetting the trip computer
You can reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val-
ues
> Calling up computer information 71
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 98
4 Calling up Check Control 78
5 Checking oil level 217
6 Setting the time 76
7 Setting the date 78
8 Viewing service requirement display 74
Exiting displays
The outside temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
74
Units of measure
You can change the units for fuel consumption,
route/distance, temperature and pressure.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "SERVICE-
INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test
*
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
More information
Detailed information on service
requirements
You can call up additional information on the
maintenance regimen on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
76
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, refer to page 78; other-
wise, the effectiveness of Condition Based Ser-
vice CBS is not ensured.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 221.
Automatic Service Request*
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW center
prior to a service due date.
You can check when your BMW center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 28.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
time format on page 77.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the time and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. "Settings"
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.
Setting time zone*
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
78
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 28.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the date and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes-
sage includes indicator and warning lamps in
the instrument cluster and, in some circum-
stances, an acoustic signal as well as text mes-
sages at the top of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. These Check Control messages
can be viewed again later, refer to page 79.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Supplemental text messages
You can call up more information on the Control
Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and
on how to respond, via Check Control.
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto-
matically.
To exit the display:
Select "OK" and press the Controller.
Symbols*
Depending on the Check Control message, you
can select from among the following functions
in the supplementary text messages.
> "Service request"
Contact your BMW center.
> "Roadside Assistance"
Contact BMW Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn signal/high beam
lever.
> Some Check Control messages are dis-
played continuously and remain visible until
the malfunction has been rectified. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this, they are displayed
again automatically.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
> Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "CHECK".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls overview
80
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages. If a Check Control mes-
sage has been stored, the corresponding
lamp lights up. It is accompanied by a text
message on the Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Press the controller.
Settings on the Control
Display
Language on the Control Display
Setting the language
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visi-
ble.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
82
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Park Distance Control PDC*
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator
warn you of the presence of an object
behind your vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in
the bumper measure the distance.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 2 ft/60 cm from
the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from
the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed; oth-
erwise, physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. second
when you engage reverse gear or move the
automatic transmission selector lever to
position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 150 ft/50 m of driving or approx.
20 mph/30 km/h of speed, the system switches
off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis-
tance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-
uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> If you stop in front of an object that has been
detected by only one of the corner sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. PDC is malfunction-
ing. A message appears on the Con-
trol Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.
PDC with visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis-
play before a signal tone sounds. The display
appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC
is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Loud sound sources out-
side or inside the car can drown out the PDC
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously; oth-
erwise, there is a risk of personal injury or prop-
erty damage.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 118.
Electronic brake-force distribution
EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate. The system also recognizes unstable
driving conditions, for example if the rear of the
car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting
at an angle past the front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and DSC
OFF is displayed in the instrument panel.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have
been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing
and drive-output promoting actions are no
longer executed.
In the same way as with a differential interlock
*,
even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are
still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive
output if the drive wheels experience a signifi-
cant loss of traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: the DSC
controls the driving and braking forces.
If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC have failed.
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument
panel: DSC is deactivated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
84
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up and TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument panel.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC con-
trols the driving and braking forces.
If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC have failed.
The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC-
TION is displayed in the instrument
panel: DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the individ-
ual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre-
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized while the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reinitialize the system.
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
The system will not detect a natural, uniform
pressure loss in all four tires. Therefore, check
the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains
*
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla-
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization by selecting "Reset".
6. Start driving.
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.<
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire pressure.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with
caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
With a damaged tire, is possible to continue
driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
86
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor-
rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be
initialized.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the vehi-
cle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles
such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, out-
side temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steer-
ing response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce
your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; oth-
erwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident. Do
not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
Check the inflation pressure in the four installed
tires. The system notifies you if there is a signif-
icant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
The system must have been reset while the
inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reli-
able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
The system does not function correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated even though the tire inflation pres-
sures are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
> When a wheel without TPM electronics is
installed.
> Interference with TPM by other systems or
devices with the same transmission fre-
quency.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the tires represents the status of
the tires and the system.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A correction is only required when this is indi-
cated by the TPM.
Green wheels
The inflation pressure corresponds to the
desired state.
"TPM active" appears in the Control Display.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire.
All wheels yellow
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in several tires.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Gray wheels
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Reasons for this may be:
> TPM is being reset.
> Interference from systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency.
> Malfunction.
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reset the system.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Reset the inflation pressure by selecting
"Reset".
6. Start driving.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The resetting process
is completed automatically as you drive. On the
Control Display, the wheels are shown in green
and "Status: TPM active" is displayed.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When
driving resumes, resetting continues automati-
cally.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting, all tires on the Control Display
are displayed in yellow. The message "Low
tire!" is displayed.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps light up in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in the indicated wheel.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
When a low tire pressure is reported, the
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
88
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. The system must then
be reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the vehi-
cle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles
such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, out-
side temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steer-
ing response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate complete failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident. Do
not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Message for unsuccessful system
reset
Yellow warning lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play.
The system has detected a wheel change, but
was not reset. A reliable warning is not possible
at the current inflation pressures.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 87.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the large warning lamp lights
up in yellow.The tires appear in gray
in the Control Display. No punctures can be
detected.
Display in the following situations:
> A wheel without TPM electronics has been
installed:
Have it checked by your BMW center.
> Malfunction
Have the system checked.
> Tire Pressure Monitor was unable to com-
plete the resetting process. Reset the sys-
tem again.
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the large warning lamp lights
up in yellow.The tires appear in gray
in the Control Display.
Display in the following situations:
Interference from systems or devices that use
the same radio frequency. The system auto-
matically becomes active again when the vehi-
cle moves out of the interference zone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-
icantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-
ments. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low speed range,
e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering
angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes very
direct and less effort is required to turn the
wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced as the
speed increases. This improves the handling of
your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 83.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on. Active
steering is malfunctioning or is tem-
porarily deactivated. At low speeds,
greater steering wheel movements
are required, whereas at higher speeds the
vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering
wheel movements. The stability-enhancing
feature may also be deactivated. Drive cau-
tiously and think well ahead.
Deactivation
Active steering is deactivated to perform an ini-
tialization. A message indicates that the feature
is deactivated. Initialization may take several
minutes.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
If there is a defect, a corresponding text mes-
sage appears. Have the system checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
90
Servotronic*
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force
required to turn the wheels relative to the vehi-
cle speed.
At low speeds, the steering force is strongly
assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering.
As the vehicle speed increases, the steering
assisting power is reduced.
This system functions automatically.
Malfunctions
The warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Servotronic is malfunctioning or has
failed. Steering response will be different. You
can continue your journey, but moderate your
speed and exercise due caution. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible.
Brake Force Display*
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
When the rear fog lamps
* are switched on, the
Brake Force Display is not active and the illumi-
nated area for normal braking is reduced by
approximately half.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
4 Convertible: knee airbags
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 45 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and window on the front
passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach
holders such as for navigation instruments and
mobile phones.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes
the upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well
as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to
remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to repair
procedures of BMW with correspondingly
trained personnel and that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to
work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger air-
bags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 54.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-
tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags lights up. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the rele-
vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is
not ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger front and side airbags in accordance
with whether and how the front passenger seat
is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether
the front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child restraint sys-
tem is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system, This particularly applies to
child seats that were required by NHTSA at
the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After
mounting a child seat, ensure that the indi-
cator lamp for the front passenger airbag is
lit. It indicates that the child seat has been
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
92
detected and that the front passenger air-
bags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on when,
for example, a person of sufficient size and
in a correct sitting position is detected on
the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 57, the
warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-
dent occurs.<
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is activated
automatically in the event of an accident, a crit-
ical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's
longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.
The protection bars behind the rear head
restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced
windshield frame, the rollover protection sys-
tem ensures that the necessary headroom is
maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-
dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not
impacted after being automatically activated, it
can be reset by lowering the protection bars to
their original positions. This does not require
tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold
it there.
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from
above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps
into place.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec-
tion bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after an unexpected activation.
If the rollover protective system is
extended, do not operate the convertible
top.
Do not make any modifications to the individual
components of the rollover protection system
or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should
only be performed by a BMW center.
Faulty repair may lead to the failure of the sys-
tem or malfunctions.
To check the system and ensure flawless long-
term operation, always observe the service
intervals, refer to page 74.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Lamps
94
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off,
daytime running lights
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2 Low beams,
welcome lamps
*
3 Automatic headlamp control*, daytime run-
ning lights, welcome lamps
*, High-beam
Assistant
*, Adaptive Light Control*
When you open the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary,
switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
With halogen headlamps: when the ignition is
switched off and the switch is in position 1, only
the outside sections of the rear lamps are illumi-
nated, refer to page 230.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 96.<
Low-beam headlamps
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adap-
tive Light Control
* is active. The LED next to
the symbol is illuminated when the low beams
are on. You can also activate the daytime run-
ning lights, refer to page 95. In the situations
described above, the lamps then automatically
switch from daytime running lights to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on inde-
pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps
*.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time.
Setting duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.:"
4. Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in switch
position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than
the low beams.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lights
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Light Control*
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves such as on switchbacks or when
turning, at speeds up to approx. 40 mph/
70 km/h, an additional, cornering light is
switched on that lights up the area inside the
curve.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 94.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
Standstill function
*: to avoid blinding oncoming
traffic, the Adaptive Light Control directs light
toward the front passenger side when the vehi-
cle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi-
nating lamps are switched on and active on
both sides.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Lamps
96
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
The Adaptive Light Control is mal-
functioning or failed. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps*
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
*
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for approx.
1 second, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
High-beam Assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off. The procedure is controlled
by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview
mirror. The assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit-
uation allows. It handles this task for you and
gives you the benefit of the best possible view.
You can intervene at any time and switch the
high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 94.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn signal/high beam lever in the
direction of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high beams
are activated. The system automati-
cally switches from high beams to low beams
and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic,
traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient
lighting, e.g. on city streets.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
Whenever you wish, or when the situation
requires, you can intervene:
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the
high beams, but you would like to drive with
the low beams, simply switch off the high
beams using the turn signal/high beam
lever. This deactivates the High-beam
Assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn signal/high beam lever toward the high
beams again.
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the
low beams, but you would like to drive with
the high beams, switch on the high beams
as usual. This deactivates the system and
the high beams need to be switched off
manually, if necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn signal/high beam lever toward the high
beams again.
> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the
low beams switched on.
System limitations
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal
judgment of when to use the high beams.
Therefore, manually switch off the high beams
in situations where this is required to avoid a
safety risk.<
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
> In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation
> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings
> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways
> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs
> At low speeds
> When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered with stickers, etc.
> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror using
a cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass cleaner
Activating via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Fog lamps*
To switch on/off, press the button.
The parking lamps or low beams must
be switched on for the fog lamps to
operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up whenever the
fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you acti-
vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high
beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Lamps
98
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the brightness level and
the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps*, entry
lamps
*, cargo area lamp and courtesy lamps*
are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps
are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To reduce the drain on the battery, a few
minutes after the radio readiness is
switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on
page 57, all lights in the vehicle's passenger
compartment are switched off.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear*:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell
lamps
*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* per-
manently, press the button for the front interior
lamps for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear*,
next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area:
Draft-free ventilation 102
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature, left side
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air volume, manual adjustment; AUTO
intensity
9 Display
10 Automatic recirculated air control AUC/
Recirculated air mode
11 Temperature, right side
12 ALL program
13 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
14 Switching cooling function on/off manually
15 Rear window defroster
16 Seat heating
*, right side 50
17 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
clear
18 Seat heating
*, left side 50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Climate
100
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution
and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to
AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 28.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell.
The automatic air distribution can be switched
back on by pressing the AUTO button. The
cooling function is switched on automatically
and the manual air distribution setting is
cleared.
Temperature
Turn to set the desired tempera-
ture.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible regardless of the season,
using maximum cooling or heating power if nec-
essary, and then maintains it.
Avoid rapid switching between different tem-
perature settings. The automatic climate con-
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The system cools steadily in the lowest setting,
regardless of the outside temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest
temperature, maximum air volume
and recirculated air mode.
Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper
body region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible
> Above an outside temperature of approx.
327/06
> When the engine is running
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution and
temperature are controlled auto-
matically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is
directed toward the windshield, the side win-
dows, the upper body and the footwell.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the program so as to prevent window con-
densation as much as possible.
The program is switched off when the air distri-
bution is set manually or the button is pressed
again.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, auto-
matic control of the air volume and air distribu-
tion can be adjusted:
Press the left side of the button to
reduce the intensity. Press the
right side of the button to increase
it.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Convertible Program
The Convertible Program is active when the
convertible top is open and the AUTO program
is switched on. During the Convertible Program,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
the automatic climate control is optimized for
driving with the soft top down. In addition, the
air volume is increased as vehicle speed
increases.
The effectiveness of the Convertible Pro-
gram can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.<
Adjusting air volume manually
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left side of the button to
reduce the air volume. Press the
right side of the button to increase
it.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The
display remains the same.
Automatic recirculated air control
AUC/Recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollut-
ants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to
select an operating mode:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and
controls the shut-off automatically.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off
recirculated air mode and increase the air
volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow onto the windshield.
The recirculated air mode should not be
used continuously for lengthy periods;
otherwise, the quality of the air inside the car
will gradually deteriorate.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recircu-
lated air mode and the previous mode using a
button
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
ALL program
Press the button.
The current temperature setting
on the driver's side is transferred to
the front passenger side.
If the temperature setting on the driver's side is
changed, the temperature on the front passen-
ger side is changed as well.
The program is switched off when the setting is
adjusted on the front passenger side or the but-
ton is pressed again.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windshield and
front side windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Switching cooling function on/off
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled while the engine is running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and – depending on the tempera-
ture setting – warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
upper wires serve as an antenna and are not
part of the rear window defroster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Climate
102
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
With the blower at its lowest set-
ting, press the left side of the but-
ton to switch off the automatic cli-
mate control.
All displays are cleared except for the rear win-
dow defroster if it is switched on.
The outside air supply is blocked when
the automatic climate control is switched
off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window
fogs over, switch the system back on and
increase the air volume.<
Switching on
Press any button except the ALL or the rear
window defroster button to reactivate the auto-
matic climate control.
Ventilation
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the levers to change the direction of the
airflow
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, e.g. if it has become too hot
in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-
ter replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
Parked car ventilation*
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive, refer to page 16. Two different
switch-on times can be preselected.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on
for approx. 30 minutes. The system can also be
switched on and off directly. Due to its high
power consumption, it should not be switched
on twice in a row without driving in between to
allow the battery to recharge.
The parked car ventilation system comes on if
the outside temperature is above 597/156
when the switch-on time was preselected, but
is ready for use at any temperature when the
system is switched on directly.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper
body area in the instrument panel. The air vents
must therefore be open.
Switching on and off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
104
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled devices,
such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys-
tems. The integrated universal remote control
registers and stores signals from the original
hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 105.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or
travel range of the device being operated. Com-
ply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device is
compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
For additional information, please contact your
BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
press the left and right memory buttons 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons
are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 sec-
onds, alter the distance and repeat this
step.
Canada: if the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step or, if the programming
by means of the hand-held transmitter was
interrupted, press and hold the memory
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
button and then press and release the but-
ton on the hand-held transmitter several
times, holding it for 2 seconds each time.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is
switched on.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory but-
ton 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote
control flashes rapidly and then remains lit for
about two seconds, the original hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system.
If it uses an alternating-code system, program
the memory buttons 1 as described under
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press and hold the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control for about 3 seconds.
Repeat this operation, if necessary up to
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact
your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap-
idly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step.
Canada: if the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step or, if the programming
by means of the hand-held transmitter was
interrupted, press and hold the memory
button and then press and release the but-
ton on the hand-held transmitter several
times, holding it for 2 seconds each time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
106
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the convertible top
is fully closed.
4. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
5. Convertible: open the convertible top fully
and repeat step 4.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Set the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold the cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 28.
USB interface for data transmission
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections, refer to
page 165.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
108
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains a credit card holder and, depending on
the equipment version, a compartment or a
snap-in adapter
*.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-IN port, refer to page 166
> USB audio interface
*/additional connection
of the music player in the mobile phone
*,
refer to page 166
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Compartments are located next to the steering
column
*, on the doors and in the center con-
sole.
Coupe: clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks in the rear.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks; other-
wise, they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-
ing.<
Cupholders
Use lightweight and shatterproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the cupholders; other-
wise, damage could result.<
There is one cupholder in the center console.
You can mount an attachable cupholder
* on the
side of the center console.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Ashtray*
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum
cleaner, etc. if at least one of the following sock-
ets is available. The total load of all sockets
should not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Cigarette lighter socket*
To access the socket:
Open the ashtray at the front and pull out the
lighter to use the socket.
In the center console
To access the socket, refer to External devices
on page 166.
Coupe: through-loading
system
Opening
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo area.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
110
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
When returning the backrest into the
seating position, make sure that the
seat's locking mechanism is properly engaged.
Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around and
endanger the occupants in the event of sharp
braking or swerving.<
The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you
with a way to attach cargo area nets
* or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 119.
Convertible: cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo area
When the convertible top is closed you can
enlarge the cargo area:
To do so, fold the cargo area partition upward.
Before opening the convertible top, pull the
cargo area partition down until it engages.
Ensure that pointed objects do not press
against the cargo area partition from below.
The convertible top can only be opened
when the cargo area partition is folded
down.<
Storage compartments inside
the cargo area
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the left
side trim panel of the luggage compartment will
contain a rubber strap
* for securing small
objects such as a folding umbrella.
The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you
with a way to attach cargo area nets
* or draw
straps
* for securing suitcases and luggage,
refer to page 120.
Coupe: ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m
length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski
bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
Ensure that the skis are clean when they are
loaded into the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to
prevent damage.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover. To stabilize the cover
in the folded-down position, place the cen-
ter panel underneath it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
4. Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining
strap to the eyelet on the side of the ski bag
opening.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Convertible: through-loading
opening with integrated
transport bag*
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean
transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up
to 2 snowboards.
With the transport bag you can stow skis up to a
length of 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m
length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski
bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
When using the transport bag, it is not
permissible to transport passengers in
the rear seats.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
112
Loading
1. Pull the grip in the filler piece of the rear
backrest up and take out the filler piece.
2. Place the filler piece onto the seat cushion
with the backrest side facing up.
3. In the cargo area: press the two recesses
together and fold down the cover.
4. Release the strap, lay out the transport bag
between the front seats and load it.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
Ensure that the skis are clean when you load
them into the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges
to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
116
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a
road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on several factors. You can lower fuel consump-
tion and the environmental impact by taking
certain measures, adjusting your driving style
and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
Remove any unneeded cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you
have finished using them
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof
rack and the rear luggage rack after use.
Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam-
ics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher air
resistance and thus increases fuel consump-
tion.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a
month and before embarking on a long journey,
and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is
still standing, but set off immediately at moder-
ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the
cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving tips
117
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking
maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis-
tance between you and the vehicle in front of
you. A defensive and smooth driving style
keeps fuel consumption down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Use first gear only for driving off. In second and
higher gears, accelerate without hesitation or
pauses. When accelerating, shift up before
reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con-
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high-
est applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel-
erator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings
or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel sav-
ings even if standing time is as short as approx.
4seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at
the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner, seat
heating or rear window defroster draw large
amounts of power and consume additional fuel.
Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driv-
ing they have a considerable impact. Therefore,
switch these functions off when they are not
really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW
recommends having the vehicle serviced at a
BMW center. Also note the BMW service sys-
tem, refer to page 221.
General driving notes
Close the trunk lid
Only drive with the trunk closed. Failure to
do so may endanger passengers or other
road users or may damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident or a braking and evasive
maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may flow
into the passenger compartment.<
If special circumstances make it absolutely nec-
essary to drive with the trunk open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto-
matic climate control system, refer to
page 101.
3. Drive cautiously.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed in
its vicinity, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes.
Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
118
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin-
ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 213.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater
clutch wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assis-
tant, refer to page 84.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the movement range of the
pedals
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist-
ing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Down-
shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans-
mission, refer to page 61.
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch never drive with the transmission in
neutral or with the engine switched off; other-
wise, there will be no engine braking action and
no power assistance to the brakes and steering.
Manual transmission: never drive with the
clutch held down, with the transmission in neu-
tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise,
there will be no engine braking action and no
power assistance to the brakes and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving tips
119
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic cli-
mate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. In some situations,
this can result in sudden loss of tire pressure.<
Avoid fluid spills in the cargo area as they
could damage the vehicle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to
the vehicle and unstable driving conditions
may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the sum of the occu-
pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The
greater the weight of the occupants, the less
cargo/luggage can be transported.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
120
Stowing cargo
Coupe
Convertible
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Securing cargo
> Secure smaller and lighter items using draw
straps
*.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
* for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. To attach the cargo
straps, there are two lashing eyes on the
inside wall of the cargo area.
Comply with the information enclosed with
the load-securing devices.
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 245, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 55, otherwise, these could be damaged.<
Coupe: roof-mounted
luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
Fold open the cover.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 245.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Driving tips
121
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting
the glass roof, and that objects do not project
into the opening path of the trunk lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides
you reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation system
124
Navigation system
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre-
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satel-
lites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide
you to every entered destination.
Enter data only with the vehicle station-
ary, and always give priority to the appli-
cable traffic regulations in the event of any con-
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.<
Navigation data
General information
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your BMW center. Navigation
data are stored in the vehicle and can be
updated.
> Depending on the data volume, a data
update may take several hours.
> Update data while driving to reduce the
drain on the battery.
> Only the main functions of the navigation
system are available during updating.
The update is resumed automatically when a
trip is continued after an interruption.
> You can inquire as to the status of the
update.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the update, the system restarts.
> The medium that holds the navigation data
can be removed after the update is com-
pleted.
Information about navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version":
Information about the data version is dis-
played.
Updating the navigation data
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga-
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Querying status
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation update"
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 127
> Last destinations, refer to page 128
> Special destinations, refer to page 128
> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 130
> Selecting home address, refer to page 128
> Destination entry via voice*, refer to
page 131
> Destination entry via BMW Assist
*, refer to
page 129
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21.
Entering a destination
manually
To make it easier to enter town/city names and
street names, the system assists you with auto-
matic name completion and entry comparison,
refer to page 134. This makes it possible to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored town/city
names and street names can be accessed
quickly.
1. Press the button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of state/province and
town/city if the current entries should be
retained for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or displayed coun-
try.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is reduced in steps with each entry.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry
126
To delete letters:
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller.
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
To enter spaces:
> Select the symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code*
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or dis-
played city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Select an entry.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street and cross-street the same
way you entered the town/city.
After you enter the street, you can also enter
the cross street or the house number.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: entering street and house
number
1. Select "Street" or displayed street.
2. Enter the street the same way you entered
the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the digits.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
No such street at the destination
The desired street is not in the entered town/
city because it belongs to another district of the
town/city.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" displayed country.
All streets of the entered country are
offered. The corresponding town/city is dis-
played after the street name.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight street.
9. Select the street.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation", refer to page 132.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
> Setting "Route preference", refer to
page 134.
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer
to page 128.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 198.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as
destinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone
* are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer to
page. 189.
3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired,
using the "A-Z search".
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address"
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
5. "Last name" and "First name" if you wish.
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist-
ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry
128
Using the home address as a
destination
The home address must be created. Specifying
a home address, refer to page 198.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Special destinations
You can search for a special destination, e.g. a
hotel or place of interest, and start destination
guidance to the corresponding location.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of naviga-
tion data you are using.<
Opening the search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
Searching online*
1. "Google™ Search"
2. Select the special destination.
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
Special destination location
As you input the search destination, you can
select from among various options.
> "At current location"
> "At destination"
> "At different location"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
> "Along route"
A-Z search
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details.
Move the controller toward the left to exit
category details.
7. "Keyword"
8. Enter keyword.
A list of the special destinations is dis-
played.
9. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
10. Select the symbol.
11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation". Adding destination as another des-
tination, refer to page 132.
"Start search": without entering a search term,
the search is repeated with the last stored
search term.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Town/City"
3. Select or enter town/city.
4. "Category"
5. Select category.
6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, it is possible
to select several category details.
Move the controller toward the left to exit
category details.
7. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is dis-
played.
8. Select the special destination.
Details are displayed.
If several details are stored, then you can
scroll through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
9. Select the symbol.
10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation". Adding destination as another des-
tination, refer to page 132.
Displaying special destinations
List of special destinations: the special destina-
tions are displayed in order of their distance and
are displayed with a direction arrow pointing
toward the destination.
With the Professional navigation system:
In the split screen, special destinations from the
selected category are displayed as symbols in
the map view. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.
Destination entry via BMW Assist*
A connection to the BMW Concierge service is
established, refer to page 199.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry
130
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Destination entry via map
If you only know the location of a destination or
street, then you can enter the destination with
the aid of the map.
Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is displayed
on the map.
3. "Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
5. Press the controller to display additional
menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance"
or "Add as another destination".
> "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis-
plays one of the following pieces of information:
> A street name in the vicinity.
> The district.
> The coordinates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
> Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination".
> "Exit interactive map":
Go back to the map view.
> "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction".
> "Display destination": the section of the
map around the destination is displayed.
> "Display current location":
The section of the map around the cur-
rent position is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 128.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry via voice*
General information
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 23.
> During the destination entry by voice, you
can switch between voice entry and entry
via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate
the voice activation system if necessary.
> Having the possible spoken commands
read aloud: {Voice commands}
Saying the entries
> With the Professional navigation system:
City/town, street, and house number can be
entered with a single command
*.
> Countries, towns and cities, streets and
intersections can be spoken as whole
words
* in the system language, refer to
page 81, or can be spelled.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> Spell the entry if the language spoken in the
area is different from the system language.
> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag-
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
> The methods of entry depend on the navi-
gation data in use and on the country and
language settings.
Entering an address in a command*
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address aloud in the suggested
order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g. the town/city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city name can be spoken as a com-
plete word
* or spelled.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
4. Say the name of the town/city or say at least
the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit-
ies may be suggested.
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities that sound the same are compiled
in a separate list and are displayed as one town/
city followed by three dots.
1. Select an entry:
2. Select the desired town/city.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive: turn the controller until the town/city
is selected and press the controller.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
manner as the town/city.
2. {Enter address}
2. {City} or {Spell city}.
5. Select a location:
> To select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {New
entry}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry …}
> To spell an entry: {Spell city}
{Yes} or {Entry …} e.g. entry 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
Entering a house number
Depending on the data in the navigation sys-
tem, house numbers up to the number 2,000
can be entered:
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Planning a trip with
intermediate destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned using intermediate desti-
nations.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. "Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is inserted
into the destination list and highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is at the desired place in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip
After entering all intermediate destinations,
highlight the first destination and say "Start
guidance"
For example if the second destination is high-
lighted at the start of route guidance, then the
first destination is skipped over.
The symbol indicates the active intermedi-
ate destination.
Storing a trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list.
Delete existing trips as necessary to permit you
to store new trips.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter a name.
4. "OK"
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
Selecting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. "Start guidance"
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted
by the system.
{Start guidance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Changin a trip
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in
reverse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Options for intermediate destinations
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
> "Edit destination"
> "Reposition dest. in the trip": move the
intermediate destination within the list.
> "Delete dest. in the trip"
> "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not possible for some trips.
Deleting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
Selecting last trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination guidance
134
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Entering a destination, refer to page 125.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
The route is displayed on the Control Display
after it is calculated.
In the map view, the distance to the destination/
intermediate destination and the estimated
time of arrival are displayed.
The arrow display appears on the Control Dis-
play, if so desired.
Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Guidance"
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
> You can influence the calculated route by
selecting certain trip criteria.
> Route criteria can be changed during desti-
nation entry and during route guidance.
> Street types are part of the navigation data
and are taken into account in route plan-
ning, e.g. avoiding highways.
> The proposed route can differ from per-
sonal experience.
> The settings are stored for the remote con-
trol currently in use.
> Route guidance with traffic bulletins, refer
to page 140.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Fast route": time-optimized route
through a combination of the least pos-
sible distance and stretches of road that
allow rapid driving.
> "Efficient route": optimized combi-
nation of the fastest and shortest possi-
ble route.
> "Short route": short distance without
taking time into account.
> "Alternative routes": are suggested,
where possible, during active route
guidance. The individual suggestions
are labeled in color.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> "Avoid highways": highways are avoided
where possible.
> "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided
where possible.
> "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Route
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, vari-
ous views of the route are available during route
guidance:
> Arrow display on the Control Display.
> List of route segments.
> Map view, refer to page 136.
Arrow display
The following information is displayed during
route guidance:
> Large arrow: current direction of travel.
> Small arrow: indicates the next change of
direction.
> Intersection view.
> Lane information.
> Traffic bulletins.
> Distance to the next change of direction.
> Street name of the next change of direction.
Lane information
In the arrow display, the recommended lanes of
multi-lane roads are each marked with a trian-
gle.
> Filled triangle: optimum lane.
> Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It
can, however, also be possible to briefly
make additional lane changes.
Displaying the list of route segments
If the route guidance has been started, then you
can display a list of route segments. The dis-
tance to be traveled and traffic bulletins are dis-
played for each segment of the route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight the route segment.
The route segment is displayed in the preview
map.
Bypassing a section of the route
During route guidance, prompt the navigation
system to bypass certain route segments. In
doing so, you will specify how many kilometers
to travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired mile-
age.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
4. "Remove blocking"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination guidance
136
Gas station recommendations
The remaining range is calculated and filling
stations along the route are displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of filling stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance": route guidance to the
selected filling station is started.
"Add as another destination": the filling sta-
tion is incorporated into the route.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Voice instructions"
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory key, refer to page 21.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Map view
Displaying the map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Overview
1 Toolbar
2 Route segment with traffic obstruction
3 Road sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status box
7 Lower status box
Lines on the map
Streets and roads are depicted with different
colors and lines according to their classification.
Dotted lines represent railroad and ferry con-
nections. National borders are depicted with
thin lines.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route identify
route segments with traffic obstructions,
depending on map scale. The direction of the
triangles indicates the direction of the obstruc-
tion.
Road signs classify the obstructions.
> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the
planned route or direction of travel.
> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not
relate to the planned route or direction of
travel.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 138.
Planned route
After route guidance is started, the planned
route is displayed on the map.
Status boxes
Show/hide: press the controller.
> Upper status box: time, phone details, and
entertainment details.
> Lower status box: symbol for active route
guidance, traffic bulletin status, arrival time,
and distance from destination.
Toolbar
The following functions are available directly in
the map view:
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
> To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the con-
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the
map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your loca-
tion to the destination.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
Set the optimized map view.
> "Day/night mode"
Select and adjust depending on light condi-
tions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
Settings are not taken into account.
> "Satellite images"
Depending on the availability and resolu-
tion, satellite images
* are displayed in
scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km
to 1,000 km.
> "Perspective view in 3D"
Displays a three-dimensional view. Promi-
nent areas that are contained in the naviga-
tion data are displayed on the map in 3D.
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins. Symbols for the special destina-
tions are no longer displayed.
Symbol Function
Starting/stopping destination
guidance
Switching voice instructions on/
off
Changing route criteria or
selecting route alternatives
Special destinations
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map view settings
Changing scale
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination guidance
138
Map view for the split screen display
The map view for the split screen can be
selected separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
4. Select "Split screen content" or scale.
5. Select the map view:
> "Arrow display"
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Map view with perspective"
> "Position"
> "Exit ramp view"
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
6. To change the scale: switch to the split
screen and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins*
Overview
> You can display the traffic bulletins from
radio stations that broadcast the TMC
(Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic infor-
mation service. Bulletins about traffic
obstructions and hazards are continuously
updated.
> Traffic bulletins are indicated by symbols on
the map.
> Traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are
stored in a list.
The symbol in the toolbar of the map view
turns red if a traffic bulletin relates to the calcu-
lated route.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-
User is in material breach of the terms and con-
ditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net-
work") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho-
rized or unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit-
ted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material will
be error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limita-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing
or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
damages (including, without limitation, lost rev-
enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so those particular limita-
tions may not apply to you.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Accessing traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order
of their distance from the current vehicle
position.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information":
Display additional information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if desired.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Con-
trol Display changes to a grayscale display. This
enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The
day/night mode is disregarded in this setting.
Symbols or special destinations are no longer
displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the
location of the traffic obstruction along the
route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions
are displayed.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc-
tion's length, direction and impact are displayed
on the map using triangles or gray bars along
the calculated route.
> Red: traffic congestion
> Orange: stop-and-go traffic
> Yellow: heavy traffic
> Green: clear roads
> Gray: general traffic information, e.g. con-
struction zone
The bulletins displayed depend in the respec-
tive traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
Set which traffic bulletins are displayed on the
map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins from the selected categories
are displayed on the map.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Destination guidance
140
> Traffic bulletins that lie on the route are
always shown.
> For your personal safety, it is not possible to
hide traffic bulletins that announce a poten-
tial hazard.
Route guidance with traffic bulletins
Semi-dynamic route guidance
With traffic bulletin reception switched on,
semi-dynamic route guidance is active.
The system takes into account the existing traf-
fic bulletins during route guidance. A message
is displayed as a function of the route, the traffic
bulletins, and the possible alternate routes. The
message displays the traffic bulletin and in the
event of a traffic obstruction, suggests an alter-
nate route. The difference in distance and time
between the original route and the alternate
route are also displayed.
Taking an alternate route:
"Detour"
With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the
roadway, a message is displayed without a pos-
sible alternate route.
It is also possible to take alternate routes can
also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed
via the list:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
> The system does not point out traffic
obstructions along the original route.
> Traffic bulletins will continue to be dis-
played on the map.
> Depending on the type of road and the
nature and length of the traffic obstruction,
the route can also be calculated so that you
travel through the traffic obstruction.
> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of
the setting.
To activate dynamic route guidance:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
What to do if …
What to do if…
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position.
Reception is generally available when you
are in the open.
> The destination guidance does not accept a
destination without a street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
> The destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Choose a destination as
close as possible to the original one.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in grayscale?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
Control Display changes to a grayscale dis-
play. This enables a better view of the traffic
bulletins.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new route suggestion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
On/off and tone
144
On/off and tone
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
> Radio
> CD/DVD player
> CD changer
*
> Video*
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using the:
> Buttons near the CD/DVD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21
> Voice activation system
Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD
player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-
ume
> Press: switch on/off
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjusting the volume
2 Eject the CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
*
4FM/AM: change the radio station wave-
band
5MODE: change the audio and video
sources
6 Station scan/track search
> Change the radio station
> Select the track for the CD/DVD player,
CD changer and certain multimedia
devices
Switching on/off
To switch the entertainment audio output on or
off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates
that sound output is switched off.
The sound output is available for approx.
20 minutes after the ignition was switched off.
For sound output, switch the unit back on.
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the
desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Treble": height adjustment.
> "Bass": depth adjustment.
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone setting.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback, surround*
You can choose between stereo and multi-
channel playback, surround.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
When surround is activated, multi-channel
playback is simulated when playing an audio
track in stereo.
Volume
> "Speed volume": volume is adapted
depending on the speed
> "PDC
"*: volume of the PDC acoustic signal
relative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g.
for the acoustic seat belt warning relative to
the entertainment sound output
> "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone conversation.
> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker dur-
ing a phone conversation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
On/off and tone
146
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Radio
Your radio is designed for reception of the fol-
lowing stations:
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
*
> Satellite radio*
Selecting a station
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn the controller and press it
or
press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection using the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Radio
148
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer to page 21.
1. Select a station.
2. Press and hold the desired button
... .
Radio Data System RDS*
In the FM waveband, additional information is
transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. Where reception is poor or in
the event of interference, it may take some time
before the station names appear in the display.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception*
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi-
tal signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with better sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and For-
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corp.
Switching digital radio reception on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
received digitally.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Any time
shift between these two broadcasts can lead to
repetitions or interruptions in the output. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
The symbol indicates that a main station
includes additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends with HD1. The
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
station names of the subchannels end with
HD2, HD3, etc.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
In the event of poor reception, the substation is
muted for several seconds. If reception is inter-
rupted for a longer period of time, then the sys-
tem switches back to the main station.
Presets
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
You can also store the stations on the program-
mable memory keys, refer to page 21.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Satellite radio
150
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack-
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele-
phone.
Navigation bar overview
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 21.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling the channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate-
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan-
nel enabled.
You can also unsubscribe from the channels via
this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
*
Symbol Function
Changing the list view
Selecting a category
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Opening the favorites, opening
the My Favorites category
Managing the favorites
Traffic Jump
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. "Manage subscription"
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan-
nels.
Selecting a channel
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the button in the area of the CD/
DVD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or a desired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
You can also store the channels on the pro-
grammable memory keys, refer to page 21.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first sym-
bol on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Function
Channel name
Artist
Track
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Satellite radio
152
Selecting a category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad-
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal
must be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a
delay following the live broadcast. When the
buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten.
The buffer is cleared when a new channel is
selected.
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
> The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
> The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
> With a live broadcast: "live".
Timeshift menu
Automatic Timeshift
With the function activated, the audio playback
is automatically stopped when:
> There are incoming and outgoing phone
calls.
> The voice activation system is activated.
> Muting function is activated.
The audio playback continues after a time
delay.
Activating
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
Deactivating
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league and team.
Storing the artist, track or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur-
rently being broadcast. The channel informa-
tion must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic Timeshift deactivated/
activated
Symbol Function
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
6. Select the artist, track or game.
Storing the league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the desired league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is being played, the mes-
sage "Favorite alert!" appears for approx.
20 seconds.
Select "Favorites" while the alert message
is being displayed.
The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites cur-
rently being broadcast can be selected from a
list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated glo-
bally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Satellite radio
154
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Notes
> Reception may not be available in some sit-
uations, such as under certain environmen-
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio cannot influence this.
> The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings
or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast
shortly.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD/DVD player and CD changer
CD/DVD playback
Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing up. The CD/DVD is drawn in
automatically.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed
audio files, it can take several minutes to read in
the data, depending on the directory structure.
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD
*, SVCD*
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC*,
M4A
*
CD changer*
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
Starting playback
Via iDrive
Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to
page 159.
To start playback when a CD/DVD is already in
the player or changer:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Ejecting a CD/DVD
Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
Audio playback
Selecting a track using the button
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
Selecting a track using iDrive
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
*
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player
CD changer
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
156
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio
files*
Depending on the data, some letters and num-
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
5. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the
track*
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
> Track file name
Random sequence playback, Random
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played
once in random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all
tracks of the selected directory are played back
in random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed or the ignition is switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Automatic repeat*
Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are
repeated automatically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
Starting playback
For your own safety, the video image is only dis-
played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some
market-specific versions, only with the parking
brake engaged or the selector lever of the auto-
matic transmission is in the park position.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
The CD/DVD is started.
Video menu
To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-
played.
The Video menu is displayed:
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South Amer-
ica, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
0 All regions
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu
*
Starting playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous
track
Fast forward
Reverse
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
158
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
Video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the con-
troller and select "Back".
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; also refer to the information on
your DVD.
Language*
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Subtitles*
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-
play subtitles".
Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed, and then press the controller.
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Camera angle*
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD changer*
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the
left side panel in the cargo area.
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer:
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine will be ejected.
Push the magazine back in after at least
2seconds have passed so that the inserted
CDs can be read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and
do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD per compartment with the
labeled side up.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired compartment and take out
the CD.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
160
Inserting the CD magazine
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged;
otherwise, severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles; other-
wise, the CDs or the adapter might jam and no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this may be due to one of the following
reasons.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, for example, inconsis-
tent data-creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Damage
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels
or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered U.S. pat-
ents and the intellectual property of the Macro-
vision Corporation and other manufacturers.
The use of this copy protection must be
approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise
agreed with Macrovision, media with this pro-
tection may only be used for private purposes.
Copying of this technology is prohibited.
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured under license of US
patent numbers: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other patents granted and pending in both the
USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg-
istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. ©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Music collection
Storing music
The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB
devices can be stored in the music collection in
the vehicle and played from there.
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com-
pressed audio format when they are stored.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi-
cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Files
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, M4A
*,
and AAC
* formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored in the vehicle but cannot be played
back.
Regularly back up the music data; other-
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on
the hard disc.<
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry stan-
dard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may prac-
tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
5.987.525, 6.061.680, 6.154.773, 6.161.132,
6.230.192, 6.230.207, 6.240.459 and
6.330.593 as well as other granted or pending
patents. Some services supplied under license
from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
6.304.523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-
marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and
logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote"
logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Storing files from CDs/DVDs
CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/DVD
player.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed.
The tracks are stored and played back in
sequence from the music collection.
Observe the following during the storage pro-
cess:
Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
player; otherwise, the storage process will be
interrupted.
You can switch to the other audio sources with-
out interrupting the storage process. Tracks
from the current CD/DVD can also be called up,
if they have been stored already.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Music collection
162
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue storing"
The storing of the CD/DVD continues at the
beginning of the track at which storing was
interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor-
mation is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con-
nected to the USB interface in the glove com-
partment.
> Suitable devices: USB mass storage
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3
players with a USB interface.
> Unsuitable devices: USB hard drive, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with multi-
ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.
Music from Apple iPods/iPhones can be
played via the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
Music from a USB device can be stored
only via the USB interface in the glove
compartment.<
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. Select the desired category.
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired input.
or
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is automatically repeated.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search by voice*
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 23.
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
To select a track directly:
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in one command.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
2. {Music search}
3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select
artist}.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
{Title …}
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Music collection
164
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if
needed. To go up one level in the directory,
move the controller to the left.
Random sequence playback, Random
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat-
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown, it can be changed later.
An album cannot be renamed while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from it
is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
it is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur-
ing a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 107.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Restoring the music collection in the
vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the
music collection existing in the vehicle is
replaced.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices
166
External devices
Overview
AUX-IN port
Overview
> It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.
MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehi-
cle speakers.
> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and
volume settings on the audio device. Tone
may depend on the quality of the audio files.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm.
The AUX-In connection is in the center armrest.
Connect the headphone connection or line-out
connection of the device to the jack plug.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on, and
using the audio device, select a track.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices" if applicable
4. "AUX front"
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting volume
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices" if applicable
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and then press the controller.
USB audio interface*/audio
interface for mobile phone*
Overview
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is out-
put over the vehicle speakers.
Options for connecting external
devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player,
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
*
Mobile phone audio interface*
Bluetooth audio*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are
supported by the USB audio interface.
> Connection via the snap-in adapter
*, when
equipped with extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile phone: Apple
iPhone or mobile phones. Playback may
only be possible when no device is con-
nected to the AUX-IN port.
Because of the large number of audio devices
available on the market, an operation via the
vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio
device/mobile phone.
Ask a BMW center for suitable audio devices/
mobile phones.
Audio files
Playback of standard audio files is possible:
> MP3
> WMA
> WAV (PCM)
> AAC
*, M4A*
> Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS
Connecting via the USB audio interface
Lift up the center armrest.
1 AUX-IN port for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm.
2 USB interface
Apple iPod/iPhone
Use a flexible adapter cable for the connection.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB
interface 2.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup-
ported by the USB audio interface.
USB device
To protect the USB interface and USB device
from mechanical damage, connect them with a
flexible adapter cable.
Connect the USB device to the USB interface 2.
After initial connection
Information about all tracks, e.g. artist or music
style and the playlists are imported into the
vehicle. It can take some time, depending on
the USB device and the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
The data from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the vehi-
cle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
36,000 tracks are stored, then the data of exist-
ing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
Playback begins with the first track.
After a few seconds, the divided screen mask,
split screen
*, will display the CD cover associ-
ated with the track, if so desired.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices
168
Track search
Selection is possible via:
> Playback lists.
> Information: music style, artist, album,
track.
> Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
Track titles are displayed if they have been
stored in the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Search"
5. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre", "Art-
ist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired input. When a character is
entered, a filter is applied using this
character as the first letter. When several
characters are entered, all results are
displayed that contain this sequence of
characters.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if you wish to display all of the
tracks of a particular artist, then only select
this artist. All of the tracks by that artist are
then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
To open playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence
The current list of tracks is played in random
sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback*
Overview
Video playback possible via snap-in adapter.
They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is out-
put over the vehicle speakers.
Playback
For your own safety, the video image is only dis-
played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some
market-specific versions, only with the parking
brake engaged or the selector lever of the auto-
matic transmission is in the park position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Video"
5. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin play-
back.
Video menu
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme
environmental conditions, e.g. very high tem-
peratures, refer to the operating instructions of
the audio device.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a maximum current of 500 mA, if the
device supports this. For this reason, do not
connect the device to a charging socket in
the vehicle; otherwise, it may not be possi-
ble to ensure correct playback.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio*
Overview
> It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music
files from external devices, e.g. audio
devices or mobile phones.
Using a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 166.
> Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
> The volume of the sound output depends
on the device. If necessary, change the vol-
ume setting on the device.
> Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
> Suitable device. For information, go to
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
> Device operational.
> Ignition switched on.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 178, and in the device.
> Activating Bluetooth audio, refer to
page 177.
> Bluetooth presets in the device are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to owner's manual for the
device.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Blue-
tooth passkey. Only required once for pair-
ing.
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
to endangerment of passengers or other road
users.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. "Add new phone"
Symbol Format
Next video file
Previous video file
It may be necessary to click the
symbol twice in order to play the
previous video file.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices
170
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
5. To perform other operations on the device,
refer to the owner's manual for the device:
e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth
device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device's display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device's display.
You will be prompted by iDrive or the device
to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".
9. "OK"
If the pairing was successful, the device is dis-
played as connected.
symbol displayed in white: device is active
as an audio source.
If the pairing was not successful: What to do
if…, refer to page 171.
Connecting a particular device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connection is not possible if a data exchange is
currently taking place via a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
Prerequisite
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired
devices.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
Connecting a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
symbol displayed in white: device is active
as an audio source.
Playback
General information
> The display of track information depends on
the device.
> Operation via the device or iDrive are both
possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
171
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange is
taking place with a mobile phone that is
connected via Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1. Connect device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired title from the list.
Playback menu*
Depending on the device, all functions may not
be available.
Disconnecting an audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Select the desired device from the list of
connected devices.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
With a mobile phone, only the audio connection
is disconnected. All other connections remain
active.
Unpairing device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. "Bluetooth® audio" if applicable
4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
Information about suitable devices is available
at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 176.
> Device not supported by vehicle.
If necessary, perform a software update
*,
refer to page 172.
> Device could not be paired or connected.
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey
on the device and via iDrive.
Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary,
delete the connections with other devices.
Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
External devices
172
Is the device no longer responding? Switch
the device off and back on again.
Repeat the pairing procedure.
> No music can be played.
Start the program for playing music files on
the device and if necessary, select a track
via the device.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
> Music files only play quietly.
Adjust volume settings on the device.
> Playback is interrupted by the press of a
button or other messages on the device.
Switch off key tones and other acoustic sig-
nal on the device.
> Playback is interrupted by a phone call or
traffic report and does not automatically
continue.
Activate and deactivate the radio mute on
the radio control panel.
> Playback is not possible when the mobile
phone is connected via Bluetooth audio and
at the same time via the extended connec-
tivity of the music player in the mobile
phone
*.
Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g.
the audio connection, refer to page 171,
and start playback again.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function please
contact Customer Relations or a BMW center.
Software update*
The vehicle supports various external devices,
depending on the software it is currently using.
A software update can enable the vehicle to
support new mobile phones or new external
devices, for example.
Software updates and associated, up-to-date
instructions are available on the web page
www.bmwusa.com/update.
Displaying current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
Select the desired version
* to display additional
information
*.
Updating software by USB*
The software update can only be performed
when stopped.
1. Save the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB data storage
device.
2. Connect the USB data storage device to the
USB interface of the USB audio interface in
the center armrest. It is not possible to per-
form the update using the USB interface in
the glove compartment.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. "USB" if applicable
7. "Start update"
8. "OK"
All of the listed software updates are installed.
Restoring to previous version
If necessary, it is possible to restore the system
to the software version prior to the last software
update.
Restoring to the previous version can only be
performed when stopped.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
173
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. Click "OK" twice.
All of the listed software updates are removed.
Note
BMW Assist*, Office functions, and connected
devices may be temporarily unavailable during a
software update or while restoring to the previ-
ous version. Wait a few minutes until the func-
tions are available once more.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes how to use
the telephone, BMW Assist and
BMW TeleServices.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Telephone
176
Telephone
At a glance
The concept
Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g.
audio players, can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth® SIG, Inc.
After being paired once, when the ignition is
switched on, these devices are automatically
detected as soon as they are present in the
vehicle and can be controlled via iDrive, the but-
tons on the steering wheel, and by voice
*.
Depending on whether they are functioning as a
telephone and/or as an audio source, external
devices can be used via the vehicle. The tele-
phone functions will be described below. Oper-
ation of audio functions, refer to page 169.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
It may be necessary for some functions to be
activated by the mobile phone provider or ser-
vice provider.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the hands-
free system instead. Otherwise, you may
endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Snap-in adapter*
The snap-in adapter makes it possible:
> Accommodate the mobile phone.
> Recharge its battery.
> Connect it to an external antenna of the
vehicle.
This assures a better network connection
and constant sound quality.
Suitable mobile phones
For precise information about which mobile
phones and external devices with a Bluetooth
interface are supported by the mobile phone
preparation, go to www.bmwusa.com/blue-
tooth.
Displaying vehicle identification
number and software part number
Checking which mobile phones are supported
by the mobile phone preparation requires the
vehicle identification number and software part
number. The software version of the mobile
phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
With a certain software version, these suitable
mobile phones support the vehicle functions
described below.
With other mobile phones or software versions,
malfunctions may occur.
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
It is possible to perform a software update, refer
to page 172.
Pairing/unpairing mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
> Using the mobile phone as a telephone.
> Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary
phone
*.
> Using the mobile phone as an audio source.
> Using an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 169.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
177
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Requirements
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 176.
> Mobile phone operational.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 178, and in the mobile phone.
> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are
required, e.g. connection not confirmed or
visible, refer to owner's manual for the
mobile phone.
> Deactivating Bluetooth audio, refer to
page 177.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Blue-
tooth passkey. Only required once for pair-
ing.
> Ignition switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Additional functions
Auxiliary phone*
A mobile phone can be used as an auxiliary
phone.
Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be
accepted, refer to page 180. missed calls to the
auxiliary phone can be shown in the Control
Display.
Office
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages, and emails
* are imported from the
mobile phone into the vehicle.
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Activating/deactivating additional
functions
To use these functions in the vehicle, activate
them before pairing. For information on suitable
mobile phones that support these functions,
refer to page 176.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
4. Select the desired additional function:
> "Additional telephone"
> "Office"
> "Bluetooth® audio"
If an additional function is deactivated, it cannot
be assigned to a phone.
Pairing and connecting a device
Only pair the device when the vehicle is
stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead
to endangerment of passengers or other road
users.<
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Telephone
178
4. To perform other operations on the mobile
phone, refer to the owner's manual for the
device: e.g. search for and connect Blue-
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
You will be prompted by iDrive or the mobile
phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass-
key.
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of devices.
Functions supported by the mobile phone and
audio device are displayed as symbols during
the pairing.
White symbol: function active.
Gray symbol: function inactive.
Four devices can be paired with the vehicle
simultaneously. Three devices can be con-
nected to the vehicle simultaneously.
If the pairing was not successful: What to do
if…, refer to page 179.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The phone book entries of the telephone
that are stored on the SIM card
* or the
mobile phone are imported into the vehicle
once the device is detected, depending on
the mobile phone.
> Four devices can be paired.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the mobile
phone operating instructions.
Connecting a particular device
If more than one device is detected by the vehi-
cle, the device at the top of the list is connected.
A different device can be connected by select-
ing it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired devices are listed.
3. Select the device to be connected.
The functions assigned before the unpairing of
the device are assigned to the device when it is
reconnected. If a device is already connected,
then these functions are deactivated if neces-
sary.
Configuring devices
Additional functions can be activated or deacti-
vated in paired and connected devices.
Symbol Function
Telephone
Auxiliary phone
*
Audio source
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the device to be configured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. Select the desired functions. At least one
function must be selected.
> "Telephone"
> "Additional telephone"
> "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a device is assigned a function, this may deac-
tivate the function in an already connected
device and cause the other device to be
unpaired.
Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary
phone*
If the telephone and auxiliary phone are con-
nected to the vehicle, the function can be
swapped between the two devices.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing device
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
All paired devices are listed.
3. Highlight the device to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones,
refer to page 176.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con-
nected.
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and vehicle match? Enter the same
passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the audio connection activated? Deacti-
vate the audio connection.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter
* or via
a charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
Telephone functions not possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Telephone
180
> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary
phone and is the auxiliary phone function
deactivated? Activate the function.
> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the
mobile phone as a telephone.
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
> It is possible that only the phone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM
card
* are transferred.
> Phone book entries with special characters
may not be displayed.
> The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
> The data volume of the phone book entry is
too great, e.g. due to additionally stored
information such as notes? Reduce the data
volume.
> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or auxiliary phone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The telephone connection quality is low.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi-
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal.
> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter
* or place it in the vicinity of the cen-
ter console.
> Adjust the volume of the microphone and
speaker separately.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function, please
check the website www.bmw.com/bluetooth
for further notes or contact Customer Relations
or a BMW center.
Operation
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the mobile phone and the
volume of the person on the phone with you.
Depending on the mobile phone, it may be nec-
essary to adjust the volumes.
Adjustments are only possible during a call and
must be carried out separately for each phone.
When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes
the settings.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. To select the desired setting:
"Microphone" or "Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, then
the name and number of the contact are dis-
played; otherwise, only the number is dis-
played.
If a contact is assigned more than one phone
number, then only the name of the caller is dis-
played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
With calls to the auxiliary phone*, only the num-
ber is displayed if it is transmitted by the net-
work.
An incoming call to the auxiliary phone is auto-
matically rejected if a call with the phone is cur-
rently active.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is connected to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "End call"
Entering phone numbers
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select the symbol.
It is also possible to enter phone numbers by
voice.
Calls with multiple parties
General information
It is possible to switch between two calls or to
connect two calls to establish a conference call.
These functions must be supported by the
mobile phone and by the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
need to be adjusted for this.
When a second call comes in during an ongoing
call, a call-waiting signal sounds.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Telephone
182
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is continued.
Switching between two calls, toggling
Active call: highlighted.
The call on hold is identified with:
"on hold...".
"Swap calls"
The phone switches to the call on hold.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Muting the microphone
The microphone can be muted in active calls.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
The muted microphone is automatically acti-
vated:
> If a new call is made.
> When switching between callers on hold.
Keypad dialing
Use keypad dialing to gain access to network
services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely
access an answering machine. This requires
the DTMF code.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select contact from a list or "Dial number"
3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Enter a DTMF code.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts of the
telephone and shows all contacts for which a
phone number is entered. The entries can be
selected to make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts, refer to page 188.
Calling a contact
Contacts with a stored phone number: select
the desired contact. The connection is estab-
lished.
Contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the desired contact and then
select the phone number. The connection is
established.
Editing a contact
Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
are transferred to the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. In some cases, only numbers
that were dialed from the vehicle are displayed.
The last 20 phone numbers dialed are dis-
played. The sorting of the phone numbers
depends on the mobile phone.
Dialing the number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and phone number,
if necessary.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. Select "Store contact" if necessary
Received calls
Displaying calls
The list of received calls in the mobile phone is
transferred into the vehicle, depending on the
mobile phone. In some cases, only calls that
were received in the vehicle are displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Contact with a stored phone number.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible. The mobile phone
has no reception or network or a Ser-
vice Request is currently active.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Telephone
184
The last 20 calls received are displayed. The
sorting and displaying of phone numbers
depends on the mobile phone.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. Select "Store contact" if necessary
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can be continued using the mobile
phone and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the dis-
play of the mobile phone, also refer to the
owner's manual of the mobile phone.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
the owner's manual of the mobile phone.
Operation by voice
commands*
With voice activation system:
Operation, refer to page 23.
Without voice activation system:
Depending on your equipment, the mobile
phone can be operated by voice as described
below.
The list of short commands in the Owner's
Manual applies only to this type of voice activa-
tion.
The concept
> The mobile phone can be operated without
removing your hand from the steering
wheel.
> In many cases, the entry process is sup-
ported by means of announcements or
questions.
> {...}indicates commands for voice activa-
tion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say the command.
Finishing voice input
Press the button on the steering wheel
briefly
or
Possible commands
Having the possible commands read
aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
Possible commands are read aloud.
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
Each digit can be spoken individually or com-
bined into a sequence to accelerate the entry
process.
Using alternative commands
Often there is more than a single command to
run a function, e.g.:
Example: dialing phone numbers
To start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone numbers
Digit sequences can be deleted after the sys-
tem has repeated the digits.
The command can be repeated as often as nec-
essary.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Redialing
Voice phone book*
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice com-
mands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
{Dial name} or {Name}.
You say Voice command response
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
{Löschen}.
{Redial}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Telephone
186
Storing the entry
Deleting the entry
Deleting all entries
Listening to and selecting entries
Selecting an entry
Adjusting volume
Turn knob during announcement.
> The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Notes on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini-
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button
*, refer to
page 234, in the vicinity of the interior rearview
mirror.
Ambient conditions
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha-
sis and speed.
> Always say commands in the language of
the system. The language of the voice acti-
vation of the mobile phone is preset and
cannot be changed via the Control Display.
> Keep the doors, windows, glass sunroof
*,
and convertible top
* closed to prevent
interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Snap-in adapter*
Installation location
In the center armrest.
Inserting snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a
speaking duration of about 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. {Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting the phone book
opens.
2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading the phone book
opens.
2. Say {Dial number} when the desired
entry is read.
1. {Dial name}.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front,
arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until
it clicks into place.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be
necessary to remove the protective cap of
the antenna connector and from the USB
connection of the mobile phone.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the
mobile phone up towards the electrical con-
tact points and press it downward until it
engages.
Removing mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Office
188
Office
At a glance
General information
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
messages, and emails
* can be displayed using
the Control Display if the mobile phone compat-
ibly supports these functions and the required
Bluetooth radio standards.
For information about which mobile phones and
functions support the functions of Office, go to
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
A limited number of compatible mobile phones
are available for Office.
Contents are only displayed completely when
the vehicle is stopped.
Only read access to the mobile phone is possi-
ble.
Do not use Office while driving. Make
entries only when traffic and road condi-
tions permit; otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by
being distracted.<
Requirements
> A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, the data access to the mobile
phone must be confirmed.
> Time zone, time, and date, refer to page 76,
are correctly set on the Control Display and
on the mobile phone in order, for example,
to correctly display appointments.
> Office is activated, refer to page 177.
Updating
Data are updated each time the mobile phone is
connected to the vehicle. Appointments, tasks,
notes, and reminders can be updated sepa-
rately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Data from the portable phone are transmit-
ted to the vehicle again.
Current office
The number of unread messages and active
tasks as well as upcoming appointments are
displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Selecting the desired entry to display
details.
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The con-
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well, if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be used as destina-
tions for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Displaying contacts
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Dialing a phone number*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
If a contact is changed, the changes are not
stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is dis-
played.
Selecting a contact as a destination*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
With contacts from the mobile phone, the
address must be compared with the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation"
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, then a
copy is established in the vehicle. The address
is not changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone
numbers, 2 addresses, 3 email addresses, and
one Internet address.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has
not been checked as a destina-
tion.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Office
190
4. "New contact"
5. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
7. Enter text and assign a contact type.
8. When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that destination guidance is possible for all
addresses.
9. "Accept address" if necessary
10. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Phone numbers and addresses can be
assigned various contact types.
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting name sorting*
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored in
your mobile phone, the sorting of names can
differ from the sorting selected.
Displaying contact pictures*
Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the
vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to
the vehicle. The mobile phone must support
this function.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Show images"
The display of all contact pictures is activated or
deactivated.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. "Options"
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Messages
General information
The displaying of text messages and emails*
from the mobile phone depends on whether the
mobile phone supports transmission into the
vehicle from the mobile phone. Text messages
and emails
* may not be supported by the ser-
vice provider or the function may have to be
Symbol Meaning
Private phone number
Business phone number
Mobile phone number
Other phone number
Private address
Business address
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
191
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
separately activated. After a mobile phone is
paired for the first time, the transmission may
take several minutes. Messages are only dis-
played completely when the vehicle is stopped.
Messages from the auxiliary phone
* are not
transferred.
To display various messages:
> Text messages.
> Messages from My info
*.
> Messages from the BMW Concierge ser-
vice
*.
> Emails
* from the mobile phone.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
Message type
A symbol indicates the type of message.
Read message.
Unread message.
Filtering message list*
The message list can be filtered if it contains
more than one message type.
1. "Filter:"
2. Select the message type.
> "All"
All messages are displayed.
> "E-mail"
Only emails from the mobile phone are
displayed.
> "Services messages"
Only messages from the BMW Con-
cierge service and My Info are displayed.
> "Text message"
Only text messages from the mobile
phone are displayed.
Deleting messages
Messages from the Concierge service, My info,
and BMW Online
* can be deleted.
To delete a message:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
4. Open "Options".
5. Open "Delete message".
To delete all messages:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all messages"
Text message
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected
*, refer to page 194.
Having text messages read aloud*
Having text messages read aloud, refer to
page 194.
Symbol Message type
Text message
My Info
Message from the Concierge
service, refer to page 199
Email
* from the mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Office
192
My Info
Starting destination guidance
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation"
Dialing a number in a message
Up to 4 phone numbers can be sent with a mes-
sage.
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Call":
If the message contains a number, a tele-
phone connection is established.
"Select phone number":
If the message contains more than one
number, select the desired number from the
list. A telephone connection is established.
Saving an address
1. Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Messages from the Concierge service*
Starting destination guidance
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another des-
tination"
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
Dialing a number in a message
Up to 4 phone numbers can be sent with a mes-
sage.
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Call":
If the message contains a number, a tele-
phone connection is established.
"Select phone number"
If the message contains more than one
number, select the desired number from the
list. A telephone connection is established.
Saving an address
1. Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Displaying additional information
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Further information"
Email*
Displaying email
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
Displaying email contacts
If the sender and recipient of an email are trans-
ferred from the mobile phone, they are dis-
played in the email.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the email address is stored in the contacts,
the contact is displayed. Select contact to dis-
play details.
If the email address is not stored in the con-
tacts, then the display might show only the
email address.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected
*, refer to page 194.
Having an email read aloud*
Having an email read aloud, refer to page 194.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
193
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Calendar
Displaying calendar
Appointments from the last 20 days and the
next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
Appointments of the current day are dis-
played.
Selecting calendar day
1. Select date.
2. Select desired day or date.
> "Next day"
> "Date:"
> "Previous day"
> "Today"
Displaying appointment
1. Select the desired appointment.
2. To scroll through appointment, if neces-
sary:
> Turn the controller.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected
*, refer to page 194.
Reading an appointment aloud
Reading an appointment aloud, refer to
page 194.
Tasks
Displaying task list
Display open tasks that must be completed
within the next 90 days.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting task list
1. Select the top line in the task list.
2. To select a sorting criterion:
> "Priority (!)"
> "Subject"
> "Due date"
Displaying task
1. Select the desired task.
2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:
> Turn the controller.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected
*, refer to page 194.
Reading a task aloud*
Reading a task aloud, refer to page 194.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Office
194
Notes
Displaying notes
1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying a note
1. Select the desired note.
2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:
> Turn the controller.
> Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected
*, refer to page 194.
Reading a note aloud
Reading a note aloud, refer to page 194.
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders for imminent appointments and
tasks are displayed. After an appointment has
passed or a task is due, the reminder is no
longer displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The associated appointment or task is dis-
played.
Using contact data
At a glance
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected
*, refer to page.
Displaying a contact or selecting a
phone number
1. "Use contact data"
2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:
> Select a contact to display a detailed
view of the contact.
> Select a phone number to directly estab-
lish a connection.
Storing contact data
1. "Use contact data"
2. Highlight a phone number or email address.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading aloud*
Text messages, emails*, appointments, tasks,
and notes can be read aloud.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
While the message is being read aloud, you
have the following options:
> "Pause"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
195
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Interrupt the reading. Select again to
resume the reading.
> "Back to beginning"
Read message again from the beginning.
> Select the symbol.
Skip back one paragraph.
> Select the symbol.
Skip over a paragraph.
> To terminate the reading, move the control-
ler toward the left.
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones,
refer to page 176.
> Appointments, tasks, notes, texts, or
emails
* from the mobile phone are not dis-
played?
The mobile phone is not suitable for the
missing function or is not correctly con-
nected.
The mobile phone has not been assigned
the Office function.
The mobile phone is connected as an auxil-
iary phone.
The appointments are older than 20 days
and are more than 50 days in the future.
The tasks have been marked as completed
or are more than 90 days in the future.
Depending on the number of appointments,
tasks, notes, and messages stored in the
mobile phone, not all of them are displayed
in the vehicle.
> Appointments or tasks from the mobile
phone are not being displayed at the correct
time?
The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly
set in the Control Display and in the mobile
phone.
> Texts of entries are not displayed com-
pletely?
Texts are already shortened by the mobile
phone.
Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle can take a few minutes.
> Contact pictures are not being displayed?
Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be
stored in the vehicle.
> If you have gone through all items in the list
and still cannot activate the desired func-
tion please contact Customer Relations or a
BMW center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Contacts
196
Contacts
General information
Contacts can be created and edited. The
addresses can be used as destinations for nav-
igation.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If input boxes are already filled with previous
entries: "Delete input fields"
4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
5. Entering text, refer to page 21.
When equipped with a navigation system:
enter address. It is only possible to enter
addresses that are contained in the naviga-
tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures
that destination guidance is possible for all
addresses.
6. "Store" if necessary
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Defining a home address
It is possible to store a home address. It is listed
at the beginning of the contacts.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts from the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
*
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has
not been checked as a destina-
tion.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination
*.
Mobile phone
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
197
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
Selecting a contact as a destination*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti-
nation"
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used in route guidance
must correspond to the navigation data stored
in the vehicle. The address can be checked to
ensure this.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
Selecting name sorting
Names can be displayed in different orders.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported using
Personal Profile, refer to page 28.
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ConnectedDrive
198
ConnectedDrive
BMW Assist*
General information
BMW Assist provides a number of different ser-
vices. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency
Request
* is sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the con-
tract individually agreed upon.
After the contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without you having to visit a
BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has
been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will
be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a BMW center after a new con-
tract has been signed.
Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
into a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine its current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your BMW center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. The service
must have been fully enabled.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
> Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic Emergency Request: under cer-
tain conditions, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established after
a serious accident. If possible, the BMW
Assist Response Center then speaks with
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance
* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
call.
> Customer Relations: connection to Cus-
tomer Relations for information on all
aspects of your vehicle.
> TeleServices: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit-
ted to your BMW center, either automati-
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist
Response Center provides assistance if, for
example, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to
the police that your vehicle was stolen, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter-
mine its position.
> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan
offers Concierge service and information on
route planning, the traffic situation and
weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited
number of calls can be made via the BMW
Assist Response Center, for example if the
mobile phone is not available or discharged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
199
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW TeleServices*
General information
TeleServices supports communication with
your BMW center.
> Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In
this way, the BMW center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of
the service appointment.
> In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance
*.
> The service varies by country.
> Connection may incur charges.
> Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Wireless reception is available.
> The engine is running.
Using BMW TeleServices*
Generally, BMW TeleServices are activated in
the vehicle.
If the services of BMW TeleServices are not
activated, it is possible to establish a voice con-
tact to the BMW Group Mobile Service.
For additional uses or to deactivate the ser-
vices, consult your BMW center or contact Cus-
tomer Relations.
Concierge service*
General information
The Concierge service of BMW Assist will
inform you, for example, about upcoming
events, filling station, or hotels and supplies you
with their phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly through the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Use of the Concierge
service requires an additional activation by the
BMW Assist Response Center.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice contact with the BMW Concierge ser-
vice is established. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted as a message.
Messages
Information about messages, refer to page 190.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted
if assistance is needed in the event of a break-
down.
Contact with BMW Roadside Assistance
* can
also be established using a Check Control mes-
sage, refer to page 78.
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
without BMW Assist or BMW
TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
BMW Roadside Assistance number is dis-
played. If a mobile phone is paired, a con-
nection to BMW Roadside Assistance is
established.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ConnectedDrive
200
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
with BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices
In a vehicle with BMW TeleServices, assistance
is first offered through the BMW Teleservice
diagnosis and then if necessary, through the
BMW Teleservice help.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
BMW Teleservice Diagnosis*
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
critical to vehicle diagnosis. Teleservice Diag-
nosis can be started after a prompt by Roadside
Assistance and termination of the voice con-
nection.
BMW Teleservice Help*
Teleservice Help enables an in-depth diagnosis
of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire-
less transmission.
Teleservice Help can be started after a prompt
by Roadside Assistance and termination of the
voice connection.
Starting BMW Teleservice Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of Teleservice Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis-
tance.
BMW Online*
At a glance
You can use BMW Online to search the yellow
pages.
License conditions:
This product contains NetFront Browser soft-
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS Co., Ltd., in Japan and other coun-
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
> Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless net-
work coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
201
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Starting BMW Online
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
3. "OK" if necessary
The BMW Online start page is displayed.
Using BMW Online
To select and display content:
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
> Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Canceling
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or BMW TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis-
played. If a mobile phone
* is paired, a connec-
tion is established to Customer Relations.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Service Request*
At a glance
Inform your BMW center that you need to
schedule a service appointment. The Teleser-
vice data is transmitted during a Service
Request. If possible, your BMW center will
establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Request"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
ConnectedDrive
202
3. "Start service"
Automatic Service Request*
The Teleservice data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
center prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the center will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
Check when your BMW center was notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Service status*
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist
Manually updating BMW TeleServices*, BMW
Assist
*, and BMW Online*.
"Update BMW Assist"
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Apps*
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable
mobile phone can be integrated into the vehicle.
These software applications are displayed on
the Control Display. They can be operated via
iDrive.
Requirements
> The mobile phone's operating system sup-
ports the use of apps.
> Software applications are installed on the
mobile phone and are operational.
> Suitable mobile phone.
> Appropriate mobile phone contract.
Additional costs possibly incurred are not
included in the price of apps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
203
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Information about suitable mobile phones,
available software applications, and their instal-
lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec-
tivity or at your BMW center.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Otherwise, you may endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users by
being distracted.
For safety reasons, some software applications
can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<
To avoid malfunctions, only use software
applications approved by BMW.<
Using apps
1. Connect the mobile phone using the snap-
in adapter or the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
You can display information about the currently
available software applications.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
Plugin*
Selected functions of the mobile phone are dis-
played on the Control Display. They can be
operated via iDrive.
1. Connect the mobile phone using the snap-
in adapter.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Use the controller to navigate in the dis-
played functions and select the desired cat-
egory or track, for example.
Press the button to move one level up or
back within the functions of the mobile
phone.
Press the button twice to switch back to
the main menu.
Notes
> The range of apps that are displayed in the
Control Display depends on the range of
software applications installed on the
mobile phone.
> The data transfer of the software applica-
tions from the mobile phone to the vehicle
may take some time. Some software appli-
cations are dependent on the speed of the
available Internet connection of the mobile
phone.
> Certain versions of the mobile phone used
and the software they use may not permit
apps to be used at the same time as the
Bluetooth hands-free system.
If necessary, restart the software applica-
tion on the mobile phone after completing a
call.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
Roadside Assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Refueling
206
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler flap
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly
press the rear edge.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes-
sage will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler flap manually:
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-
wall of the cargo area.
2. Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol
down.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> Premature pump shutoff
> Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 14 US gal/53 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Fuel specifications
Never use fuels labeled at the fuel pump as
metal-containing.
Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metal-containing additives such as
manganese or iron; doing so can cause perma-
nent damage to the catalytic converter or other
components.<
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con-
taining 85Ξ ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.
Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system
will be damaged.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
> 128i: 87
> 135i: 89
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada.
Fuels containing up to and including 10Ξ eth-
anol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8Ξ oxy-
gen by weight, that is, 15Ξ MTBE or 3 Ξ meth-
anol plus an equivalent amount of cosolvent,
will not void the applicable warranties with
respect to defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
208
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-
tion that can not only compromise your vehi-
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive
with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using
run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 87, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 85.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 128i
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 135i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S
32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 35/240 - 44/300
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 39/270 - 42/290
Compact spare wheel
*:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
60/420
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 33/230 36/250 38/260 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 36/250 - 38/260 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 39/270 - 42/290
Compact spare wheel
*:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
60/420
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
210
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 128i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sport Package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 36/250 - 41/280
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 35/240 - 35/240 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 41/280 - 41/280
Compact spare wheel
*:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
60/420
with Sport Package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 39/270 -
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V - 36/250 - 46/320
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 41/280 - 45/310
Compact spare wheel
*:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
60/420
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 135i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sport Package
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 36/250 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 39/270 - 39/270 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 41/280 - 41/280
Compact spare wheel
*:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
60/420
with Sport Package
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 36/250 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 39/270 - 39/270 -
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y - 41/280 - 45/310
Compact spare wheel
*:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
60/420
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
212
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 1011 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2011.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
(not on ZR tires)
Speed code letter,
(before the R on ZR tires)
225/45 R 1791 V
e.g.
Manufacturer's code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 1011
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 214.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazard and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
214
Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup-
porting tire and a special rim. The reinforce-
ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can
continue to be used subject to certain restric-
tions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 85.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten-
tially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot guarantee their driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or
FTM.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise,
the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to
detect a puncture, refer to page 87. Your BMW
center will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for winter roads
or at temperatures below +457/+76.
Although all-season M+S tires provide better
winter traction than summer tires, they gener-
ally fail to provide the same levels of cold-
weather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view.
Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center
can supply these labels.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
sure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes,
swapping wheels between the axles is not per-
missible.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information. Snow chains must be
mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to
page 83.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Under the hood
216
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a BMW center or by a workshop that
work according to BMW repair procedures with
correspondingly trained personnel. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment. Do
not open the engine hood before the engine has
cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 219
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean-
ing system and window washer system,
refer to page 68
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 235
4 Fluid filler neck for engine oil, refer to Add-
ing engine oil, page 219
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
For precise measurement and display of the oil
level, the engine must be at operating tempera-
ture, i.e. following at least 6.2 miles/10 km of
uninterrupted driving. You can have the oil level
displayed while you are driving, or while the
vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and
the engine is running.
Display in the instrument cluster
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol is shown in the display,
accompanied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2.
The oil level is checked and the reading dis-
played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Under the hood
218
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is on the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 219.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
5 The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 221. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level OK"
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This can take about 1 minute if the car is at a
standstill on a level surface and the engine
is running, and about 5 minutes while the
car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil below.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
*:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately; otherwise, the excess oil may
lead to engine damage.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked.":
Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to
drive, note the recalculated remaining mile-
age until the next oil change service, refer to
Service requirements on page 74. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a
corresponding message is shown on the Con-
trol Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, the engine could be dam-
aged.<
If the engine oil is too high, have the vehi-
cle checked immediately; failure to do so
may result in engine damage.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil grades to add
Do not use oil additives as this could
result in engine damage.<
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
to use one from the SAE viscosity classes
0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 or 5W-30; failure to do
so may result in malfunctions or engine dam-
age.<
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some oil grades may not be available in all
countries.
Approved oil grades
Additional information about approved oil
grades is available at your BMW center.
Alternative oil types
If approved oils are not available, you can add
quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another
oil with the following specifications:
Oil change
Oil changes should only be performed by a
BMW center.
Coolant
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is impor-
tant to follow the instructions on the contain-
ers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Coolant temperature
If the coolant and therefore the engine over-
heats, a warning lamp lights up. A message
appears on the Control Display.
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Gasoline engine
API SM or higher
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Under the hood
220
Checking coolant level
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The objective is to optimize
efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte-
nance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-
nificant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 74:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-
sor can read out this data from the remote con-
trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore hand your
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit
that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, refer to page 78; otherwise, the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Maintenance
222
Socket for Onboard
Diagnosis OBD
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check-
ing components relevant to the composition of
the vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle is producing higher emis-
sions. The trip can be continued. Have
the car checked as soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain condi-
tions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the
engine. If this happens, you should reduce your
speed and visit your nearest BMW center as
soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can
quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-
related components, especially the catalytic
converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the fuel
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor-
rectly positioned and close it until it audibly
clicks.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data about the operation,
faults, and user settings. These data are stored
in the vehicle and in extract form, in the remote
control, and can be read out using suitable
devices at your BMW center. The data that are
read out are used to support service proce-
dures and repairs or to optimize and expand
vehicle functions. If you have a BMW Assist
contract, certain vehicle data can also be trans-
mitted directly from the vehicle in order to
enable the desired services.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
223
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Care
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi-
cantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your
vehicle with products that are approved by
BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
the products and services available for cleaning
and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW CareProducts have been
material-tested, laboratory-checked and
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents as these may result in dam-
age.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, pro-
vide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products
designed for cleaning vehicles.<
Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months,
ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead
to vehicle damage.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Do not use high-pressure car washes;
otherwise, water may drip into the vehicle
around the windows.<
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is
suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 243.
> If necessary, fold in the outside rearview
mirrors, refer to page 51.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Avoid car washes with guide rail heights
over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the
danger of damaging chassis parts.<
> In Convertibles, do not treat the convertible
top with wax. Ensure that a program is avail-
able that does not apply wax or is designed
specifically for Convertibles.
Preparations before driving into an automatic
car wash:
> Unscrew the rod antenna
*.
> Deactivate the rain sensor
* to prevent unin-
tentional wiping.
> Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoil-
ers or telephone antennas, if there is a pos-
sibility that they could be damaged.
> Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
Automatic transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Care
224
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
The transmission is switched into position P:
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> If you remove the infrared remote control
from the ignition lock
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, make sure to maintain sufficient
distance from the vehicle and do not exceed a
temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
temperature can lead to component damage or
water penetration. Follow the operating instruc-
tions for the steam jet or high-pressure
washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray the sensors, e.g. of the Park
Distance Control, for an extended period and
maintain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm from
them.<
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces-
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash-
ing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unintentional activation of the
wipers.<
Observe local regulations pertaining to
washing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with copious
quantities of water.
Thaw ice with a windshield deicer and do not
use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Convertible top care
The appearance and service life of the convert-
ible top largely depends on its proper care and
operation.
Please follow these instructions:
> Never attempt to fold and stow the convert-
ible top in the convertible compartment
when the top is wet or frozen. Otherwise,
water stains, mildew, and chafe marks may
occur.
> If water spots occur on the inside headliner
despite precautions, remove them using a
microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
> If the vehicle is parked in an enclosed area
for a longer period of time, make sure that
there is sufficient ventilation.
> Remove any bird droppings immediately,
since they have corrosive properties which
will corrode the convertible top and damage
the rubber seals.
To remove stains from the convertible
top, do not use stain removers, paint thin-
ners, solvents, benzine or similar substances.
These cleaners may damage the rubber seals.
The improper care or cleaning methods may
cause the convertible top and its seams to
leak.<
To remove heavy soiling, use a special convert-
ible top cleaner.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
225
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Always read and follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
After washing the convertible top three to five
times, treat it with an impregnating agent.
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and
protects the paintwork against the long-term
effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is
important to adapt the frequency and scope of
car care accordingly.
Immediately remove aggressive materials such
as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or
bird droppings to prevent damage to the paint-
work.
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar
damage, such as that caused by stones
hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent
rusting.<
BMW recommends having paintwork damage
repaired by a professional paint repair work-
shop according to BMW specifications using
original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when
water no longer beads off the clean paintwork
surface. Only use products for paintwork pres-
ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic
waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care prod-
ucts on rubber seals; otherwise, noise
and damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radia-
tor grill, door handles or window frames with
copious quantities of water and a shampoo
additive, especially when roads are treated with
deicing salt. For additional treatment, use a
chrome polish.
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-
free rim cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline, or abrasive cleaning agents and
do not use steam jets hotter than of 1407/
606; otherwise, damage may occur.<
Outside sensors/cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the
outside of the vehicle, e.g. those for Park
Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure
that they remain fully functional.<
Interior care
Upholstery fabrics/cloth trims/
Alcantara fabrics
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to
remove superficial dirt.
To remove severe spots such as stains from
beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free
microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners.
Follow the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong
rubbing.<
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Leather/leather trim
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural
leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Care
226
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, fre-
quently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Treat the leather at least once every two
months using a leather lotion as dirt and grease
will gradually attack the leather's protective
layer.
Carpet and floor mats*
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist-
ing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Matte parts
Clean with water and solvent-free plastic
cleaner if necessary.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a
damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Interior sensors/cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of
the High-beam Assistant, use a lint-free cloth
moistened with glass cleaner.
Displays
To clean displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument
cluster, use a cleaning cloth for displays or a
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the displays; otherwise, damage
may occur.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces
or electrical components may be corroded or
damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may dam-
age parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for
longer than three months, your BMW center or
a workshop that operates according to BMW
specifications will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
227
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored below the
floor mat in the cargo area.
Wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech-
anism, pulling the blade toward the front.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-
ing your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch; otherwise, you could suffer
burns.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
If the routine for changing a particular
bulb is not described here, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light sources for many
of the controls and displays in your vehicle.
These light-emitting diodes, which operate
using a concept similar to that applied in con-
ventional lasers, are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause
irritation of the retina.<
Headlight lenses
In cool or humid weather, condensation may
form on the interior of outside lamps. When the
light is switched on, the condensation will dis-
appear after a short time. The headlamp
glasses do not need to be changed.
At high humidities, e.g. water droplets may form
in the lights; have these checked by your BMW
center.
Xenon lamps*
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never-
theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Replacing components
228
the journey with great care, provided that local
legislation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Due to high
voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if work on
the xenon lamps is carried out improperly.<
Removing the headlamp cover
1. Pull the wire brackets over the notches, see
arrows, and fold to the side.
2. Fold away the headlamp cover.
Be careful when attaching the headlamp
cover and ensure that both wire brackets
are securely in place; otherwise, leaks could
occur and cause damage to the headlamp sys-
tem.<
Attach the headlamp cover in reverse order.
Halogen headlamps
Halogen low beams and high beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
Always wear gloves and eye protection;
the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is
pressurized. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if
the bulb is damaged.<
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1 High beams
2 Low-beam headlamps
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
2. Disconnect the plug from the lamp.
3. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the
mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down,
arrow 2.
4. Remove the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb with the notch at the top.
6. Fold up the wire bracket and engage it.
7. Connect the plug.
8. Attach the headlamp cover.
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps
W5W bulb, 5 watts
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
2. Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
4. Reinsert the bulb holder.
5. Attach the headlamp cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
229
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Xenon headlamps
Parking lamps, roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lights
H8 bulb, 35 watts
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
2. Turn the bulb, see arrow, and remove it.
3. Pull off the connector and replace the bulb.
4. Attach the connector, insert the bulb and
turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
5. Attach the headlamp cover.
Corner-illuminating lamp*
H3 bulb, 55 watts
The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.
1. Remove the top headlamp cover, using the
screwdriver to push the detents to one side.
2. Turn the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove it.
3. Slide the bulb out of the holder and pull off
the connector.
4. Replace the bulb and attach the connector.
5. Insert the bulb holder and turn it all the way
in the opposite direction.
6. Attach the headlamp cover.
Turn signals, front
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover
in the wheel arch.
1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.
2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all
the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the
cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove
it, arrow 2.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning
it to the right.
6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom
edge first and then turning both locks all the
way to the right.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Replacing components
230
Side turn signals
W5W bulb, 5 watts
1. Press the rear edge of the lamp toward the
front with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it
out, arrow 2.
2. While simultaneously lifting the retaining
tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and
remove.
3. Remove lamp and replace it.
To install, insert front end of the lamp and press
into place at the back.
Tail lamps with halogen headlamps
> Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Backup lamp:
W16W bulb, 16 watts
> Brake lamps:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake Force Display lamp:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1 Inner brake lamp/tail lamp
2 Outer brake lamp/parking/tail lamp
3 Reflector
4 Lateral reflector
5 Turn signal
6 Backup lamp
7 Brake Force Display lamp/tail lamp
Tail lamps with xenon headlamps
> Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Backup lamp:
W16W bulb, 16 watts
> Brake lamps:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake Force Display lamp:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1 Roadside parking lamp and tail lamp LED
2 Inner brake lamp
3 Outer brake lamp
4 Reflector
5 Lateral reflector
6 Turn signal
7 Backup lamp
8 Brake Force Display lamp
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
231
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing tail lamps
Outer brake lamp
The outer brake lamp can be accessed through
a single socket.
The figure shows the right side of the vehicle.
1. Remove the cover from the panel of the
cargo area.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left, see arrow,
and remove it.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Attach the bulb holder and turn it all the way
in the opposite direction.
5. Reattach the cover.
With Xenon headlamps, the parking/tail
lamp uses LED technology. After replac-
ing the bulb, ensure that the bulb holder is prop-
erly seated; otherwise, the roadside parking
lamp/tail lamp may not work.<
Inner brake lamp, turn signal, backup
lamp and Brake Force Display lamp
The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.
1. Remove the cover from the panel of the
cargo area.
2. Detach the bulb holder by pressing
together the clips, see arrows, and remove
it.
3. Brake lamps and turn signal: apply gentle
pressure to the bulb while turning it to the
left for removal and replacement.
4. Backup lamp: pull the bulb out of the socket
and replace it.
5. Attach the bulb holder and let it snap into
place.
6. Reattach the cover.
License plate lamps, center brake
lamp, and parking/tail lamp*
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as
standard. This eliminates the need to change a
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a
damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on
page 85.
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
Run-flat tires, page 214.
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer
also to New wheels and tires, page 214.
The tools for changing wheels are avail-
able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Replacing components
232
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Battery replacing
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manu-
facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam-
aged and systems or functions may not be fully
available.<
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump-starting
on page 235.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or bring them to a recycling
center. Maintain the battery in an upright posi-
tion for transport and storage. Always secure
the battery against tipping over during trans-
port.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 76.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 147.
> Navigation system
Wait for the system to start, refer to
page 141.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
tilted. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
*
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 50.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 107.
> Active steering
The system automatically initializes itself
briefly during a trip. The system is deacti-
vated during this time, refer to page 89.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating; oth-
erwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
233
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
In the glove compartment
Accessing the fuse box:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the damper, arrow 1, from the
lower holder by applying forward pressure.
3. Disengage the glove compartment by
pressing on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold it
down.
Plastic tweezers are located on the distributor
box.
Information on fuse assignment can be found
next to the distributor box.
Spare fuses are available from your BMW cen-
ter.
After replacing a fuse, press the glove compart-
ment upward until it engages and reattach the
damper.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
234
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency Request*
Requirements
> Full preparation package mobile phone: this
equipment makes it possible to send an
Emergency Request even if no mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged into a
mobile phone network that is supported by
BMW Assist.
> The Emergency Request system is opera-
ble.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Subscriber contract
Upon expiration of the subscriber contract with
BMW Assist, the BMW Assist system can be
deactivated by a BMW center without a work-
shop visit.
After the system is deactivated, it is no longer
possible to make Emergency Requests.
It may be possible for a BMW center to reacti-
vate the system after a new contract has been
signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button comes on.
> The LED comes on: the Emergency
Request has been triggered.
If the circumstances allow, remain in the
vehicle until the voice contact has been
established.
> The LED flashes when the connection to
the BMW Assist Response Center has been
established.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center
has received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts
you and takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Assist Response Center will be able
to initiate further steps to assist you under
certain conditions.
Data for determining the necessary rescue
measures are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the cur-
rent position of your vehicle, if it can be
determined.
> If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. The
BMW Assist Response Center may still be
able to hear you, however.
Automatically triggering an Emergency
Request
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. An automatic Emergency
Request is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance is available by
phone around the clock in many countries. You
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
235
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
can obtain support there in the event of a break-
down.
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec-
essary.
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo area in a storage area.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the
trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.
Jump-starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order to prevent sparking at the battery,
which could cause injury.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 217. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-
nection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-
cle providing assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
236
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or
negative pole.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regula-
tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-
cles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
It is stored with the onboard vehicle tool kit
underneath the floor mat in the cargo area, refer
to page 227.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the
tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Rectangular cover panel in bumper:
Press the arrow on the cover.
Front
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Mobility
237
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 57; otherwise, the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable. There is
no power assist while the engine is off. Thus,
braking and steering will require increased
effort. Active steering is not active and it will be
necessary to turn the steering wheel further.<
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever position, refer to
page 60.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/
70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Make sure that the parking lock P is not
engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are
immobilized.
When using the car wash function, refer to
page 224, make sure that after approx.
30 minutes, the parking lock P is automatically
engaged and thus immobilizes the rear wheels.
In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the
vehicle must be towed for more than approx.
20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually,
refer to page 65.<
When towing, do not exceed a maximum
speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maxi-
mum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; oth-
erwise, the transmission may be damaged.<
BMW recommends transporting the vehicle on
a tow truck with a flatbed or towing with the rear
axle raised.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, dam-
age may result.<
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
238
With a tow truck
Manual transmission and automatic transmis-
sion:
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to
page 235. Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission or
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
completely depressed and then slowly
release the clutch. After the engine starts,
immediately depress the clutch completely
again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains technical data,
short commands for the voice activation
system and an index that will help
you find information most quickly.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technical data
242
Technical data
Engine data
128i 135i
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,300-5,000
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
243
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 35.1 ft/10.7 m
135i: height 55.4 in/1,408 mm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technical data
244
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 35.1 ft/10.7 m
135i: height 54.8 in/1,392 mm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Coupe
Convertible
128i 135i
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs./kg 4,134/1,875 4,255/1,930
> with automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,211/1,910 –
> Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch
lbs./kg – 4,321/1,960
Load lbs./kg 794/360 794/360
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,028/920 2,116/960
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,293/1,040 2,293/1,040
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 13.1/370 13.1/370
128i 135i
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs./kg 4,398/1,995 4,541/2,060
> with automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,475/2,030 –
> Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch
lbs./kg – 4,608/2,090
Load lbs./kg 750/340 750/340
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,050/930 2,161/980
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,467/1,119 2,469/1,120
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg – –
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 9.1-10.7/260-305 9.1-10.7/260-305
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Technical data
246
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank: US gal/liters approx. 14.0/53 Fuel grade: page 207
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0
Window washer system For more details:
page 68
including headlamp washers US quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Short commands for the voice activation
system
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 23.
Having the possible spoken commands read
aloud: {Voice commands}
The following short commands are for vehicles
with the voice activation system. They do not
function with equipment packages that permit
only the mobile phone to be operated by voice.
Useful short commands
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
*
Function Command
Opening a music collection {Music collection}
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Opening the settings {Settings}
Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}
Opening the contacts
* {Contacts}
Displaying the phone book
* {Phonebook}
Opening services
* {Assist}
Opening BMW Assist
* {B M W Assist}
Accessing ConnectedDrive
* {Connected Drive}
Opening the home address
* {Home address}
Opening destination entry
* {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance
* {Guidance}
Function Command
Selecting a track {Track …} e.g. track 5
or
{C D track …} e.g. CD track 5
Playing back a CD {C D on}
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D … track …} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
248
Music collection
External devices
Tone control
Radio
FM
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD
* {C D}
Displaying entertainment details on the split
screen
*
{Entertainment details}
Function Command
Function Command
Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}
Calling up the current playback {Current playback}
Opening a music collection {Music collection}
Playing back a music collection {Music collection on}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}
Function Command
Opening external devices {External devices}
Accessing Bluetooth devices
* {Bluetooth}
AUX front {AUX}
Function Command
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Function Command
Selecting a station directly {Station …} e.g. National Public Radio
Calling up the radio {Radio}
Calling up an FM station {F M}
Opening manual search {Manual}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Calling up a station {Select station}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
249
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
AM
Satellite radio
Presets
Telephone*
Office*
Function Command
Calling up an AM station {A M}
Opening manual search {Manual}
Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2
Function Command
Opening the stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset …} e.g. stored station 2
Function Command
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
Displaying phone book {Phonebook}
Redialing {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
Function Command
Opening Office menu {Office}
Displaying current Office {Current office}
Displaying contacts {Contacts}
Displaying messages {Messages}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
250
Contacts*
Navigation*
General information
Displaying calendar {Calendar}
Displaying tasks {Tasks}
Displaying reminders {Reminders}
Function Command
Function Command
Selecting a name {Choose name}
Opening the contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Opening destination entry {Enter address}
Entering an address {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance {Guidance}
Starting destination guidance {Start guidance}
Ending destination guidance {Stop guidance}
Opening the home address {Home address}
Opening the route criteria {Route preference}
Opening the route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
251
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Map
Split screen* settings
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Map perspective view}
Automatic map scaling
* {Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Scale...meters
* {Map scale … meters} e.g. map scale of
100 meters
Scale...kilometers
* {Map scale … kilometers} e.g. split screen
scale of 5 kilometers
Function Command
Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}
Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}
Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}
Split screen, current position {Split screen current position}
Split screen, map facing north {Split screen map facing north}
Split screen, direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen, perspective {Split screen perspective}
Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}
Expanded intersection zoom on the split screen {Splitscreen Exit ramp view}
Split screen scale ... meters
* {Split screen scale … meters} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 meters
Split screen scale ... kilometers
* {Split screen scale … kilometers} e.g. split
screen scale of 5 kilometers
Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins {Split screen, Traffic conditions}
Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer {Splitscreen trip computer}
Function Command
Entering a new destination {Enter address}
Trip list {Stored trips}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
252
ConnectedDrive* or BMW Assist*
Vehicle information
Settings
Vehicle
Equipment
Function Command
Opening BMW Assist* {B M W Assist}
Accessing ConnectedDrive
* {Connected Drive}
Opening BMW Search
* {B M W Online}
Function Command
Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}
Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}
Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Opening the settings {Settings}
Opening the options {Options}
Settings on the Control Display {Control display}
Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}
Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}
Opening the speed limit settings {Speed}
Opening the light settings {Lighting}
Opening the door lock settings {Door locks}
Opening profiles {Profiles}
Function Command
Opening the air conditioning settings {Climate}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
254
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 83
Acceleration assistant, refer to
Launch Control 66
Accessories, refer to Your
individual vehicle 5
Accident, reporting, refer to
Emergency Request 234
Activated-charcoal filter 102
Active steering 89
Adaptive Light Control 95
Additives
– coolant 219
– engine oil 219
Address, entering 125, 131
Address for navigation
– entering 125
Adjusting temperature 100
Airbags 90
– sitting safely 45
– warning lamp 92
Air conditioner 99
Air distribution
– automatic 100
Airing, refer to Ventilation 102
Air outlets, refer to Air
vents 99
Air pressure, checking, refer
to Tire inflation
pressure 208
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated air mode 101
Air vents 99
Air volume 101
AKI, refer to Fuel grade 207
Alarm system 34
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
– interior motion sensor 35
– switching off an alarm 34
– tilt alarm sensor 35
Albums of music
collection 163
ALL program 101
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 215
AM, waveband 147
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated air mode 101
Antifreeze
– coolant 219
– washer fluid 68
Antilock Brake System
ABS 83
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 34
Anti-theft system 29
Appointments, refer to
Calendar 193
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 245
Approved engine oils 219
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 245
Apps 202
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 108
Arrival time
– computer 72
Ashtray 109
Assistance systems, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 83
AUC Automatic recirculated
air control 101
Audible instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 136
Audio 144
– controls 144
– switching on/off 144
– tone control 144
– volume 144
Automatic
– air distribution 100
– air volume 100
– cruise control 68
– headlamp control 94
Automatic car washes 223
Automatic climate control 99
Automatic curb monitor 52
Automatic high beams and
low beams, refer to High-
beam Assistant 96
Automatic lamps
– refer to Welcome lamps 94
Automatic recirculated air
control AUC 101
Automatic Service
Request 202
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– selector lever lock 60
– shiftlock 60
– towing 236
– tow-starting 236
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 100
AUX-IN port 166
Available services 202
Average fuel consumption 72
– setting the units 74
Average speed 72
Avoid highways in
navigation 134
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 245
B
Backrests, refer to Seats 46
Backrest width adjustment 47
Back seats, refer to Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
255
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Backup lamp, replacing
bulb 231
Bag for skis, refer to Ski
bag 110
Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 235
Bar, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 237
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 186
Bass, tone setting 144
Battery 232
– charging 232
– disposal 37, 232
– jump-starting 235
– replacing 232
– temporary power failure 232
Battery renewal
– remote control for vehicle 37
Being towed 237
Belts, refer to Safety belts 50
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 50
Beverage holders, refer to
Cupholders 108
Blower, refer to Air
volume 101
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 177
Bluetooth audio 169
– disconnecting an audio
connection 171
– pairing a device 169
– playback 170
– unpairing device 171
– What to do if... 171
BMW
– car shampoo 224
BMW Assist 198
– updating 202
BMW Maintenance
System 221
BMW Online* 200
BMW TeleServices 199
Bottle holders, refer to
Cupholders 108
Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control 83
Brake fluid
– service requirements 74
Brake Force Display 90
Brake lamps
– Brake Force Display 90
– replacing bulb 231
Brake pads, breaking in 116
Brake pedal, refer to Braking
safely 118
Brake rotors 118
– brakes 116
– breaking in 116
Brakes
– ABS 83
– BMW Maintenance
System 221
– braking safely 118
– breaking in 116
– parking brake 59
– service requirements 74
Brake system 116
– BMW Maintenance
System 221
– breaking in 116
– disc brakes 118
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 234
Breaking in the clutch 116
Break-in period 116
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 227
Button for starting the
engine 57
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
Calendar 193
– displaying appointment 193
– selecting calendar day 193
California Proposition 65
warning 6
Call
– accepting 181
– ending 181
– muting the microphone 182
– rejecting 181
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 181
Calling, refer to Telephone
owner's manual
Calls
– with multiple parties 181
Can holders, refer to
Cupholders 108
Capacities 246
Capacity of the cargo area 245
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 232
Car care, refer to Care 223
Care 223
– automatic car washes 223
– care products 223
– carpets 226
– CD/DVD drives 226
– chrome parts 225
– convertible top 224
– displays 226
– exterior 223
– fine wood parts 226
– headlamps 224
– high-pressure washer 224
– interior 225
– leather 225
– light-alloy wheels 225
– paintwork 225
– plastic parts 226
– rubber seals 225
– safety belts 226
– sensors and cameras 226
– upholstery and cloth
trim 225
– washing the car
manually 224
– windows 224
Cargo, securing 120
Cargo area
– capacity 245
– Comfort Access 36
– enlarging, refer to Through-
loading system 109
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 98
– lid, refer to Trunk lid
33
– opening from outside 33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
256
Cargo area lid, refer to Trunk
lid 33
Cargo area net, refer to
Securing cargo 120
Cargo loading 119
– securing cargo 120
– stowing cargo 120
– vehicle 119
Car jack
– jacking points 232
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 28
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 108
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 176
Car radio, refer to Radio 147
Car shampoo 224
Car wash 223
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 117
CD, audio playback 155
CD changer 155, 159
– controls 144
– fast forward/reverse 157
– filling or emptying the
magazine 159
– random play sequence 156
– selecting a track 155
– switching on/off 144
– tone control 144
– volume 144
CD player 155
– controls 144
– fast forward/reverse 157
– random order 156
– selecting a track 155
– switching on/off 144
– tone control 144
– volume 144
Center armrest 108
Center brake lamp, replacing
bulb 231
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Central key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 28
Central locking
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Central locking system 29
– Comfort Access 35
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs 227
Changing gears 64
Changing the language on the
Control Display 81
Changing wheels 231
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 217
Check Control 78
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 55
Child restraint systems 54
Child seats 54
Chrome parts 225
Chrome polish 225
Cigarette lighter 109
Cleaning headlamps 67
– washer fluid 68
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 223
Climate control
– automatic air
distribution 100
Clock 70
– 12h/24h mode 77
– setting the time and date 77
– setting time 76
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Clothes hooks 108
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 58
Comfort Access 35
– replacing the battery 37
Comfort access, refer to
Comfort Access 35
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 57
Compass 106
Computer 71
– displays on Control
Display 72
Computer, refer to iDrive 16
Concierge service 199
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 119
Condition Based Service
CBS 221
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the
vehicle 30
ConnectedDrive 198
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 109
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 72
Contacts 188
– deleting 190, 197
– exporting/importing 197
– new contact 189
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display 16, 17
Control Display, refer to iDrive
– switching on/off 17
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls and displays 10
Convenient opening and
closing
– windows 30
– windows with Comfort
Access 36
– with Comfort Access 36
Convenient start, refer to
Starting the engine 58
Convertible
– rollover protection
system 92
– top 40
– wind deflector 43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
257
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Convertible top
– convenient opening 30
Convertible top care 224
Coolant 219
– checking level 220
– filling 220
Coolant temperature 219
Cooling, maximum 100
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 219
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps 95
Cornering light, refer to
Adaptive Light Control 95
Country codes DVD 157
Courtesy lamps 98
Criteria for route 134
Cross-hairs in navigation 130
Cruise control 68
Cruising range 72
Cupholders 108
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 245
Current fuel consumption 72
Current playback
– external devices 168
– of music collection 163
Customer Relations 201
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 98
Data, technical 242
– capacities 246
– dimensions 243
– engine 242
– weights 245
Data memory 222
Data transfer 202
Date
– setting 78
– setting format 78
Daytime running lights, switch
positions 95
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 83
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 91
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 30
Defect
– door lock 32
– fuel filler flap 206
– glass roof 40
Defining a home address 190
Defogging windows 101
Defrosting windows 101
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 101
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 101
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 101
Destination, entering by town/
city name 125
Destination address
– entering 125, 131
Destination entry via BMW
Assist 129
Destination for navigation
– entering by voice 131
– entering via map 130
– entry 125
– home address 128
– manual entry 125
Destination guidance 134
– bypassing a route
section 135
– changing specified
route 134
– continuing 134
– starting 134
– voice instructions 136
– volume of voice
instructions 136
Differential, breaking in 116
Digital clock 70
, 76
Digital compass 106
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 148
Dimensions 243
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 66
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 136
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 127
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 242
Display, refer to Control
Display 16
Displaying contact
pictures 190
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 98
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
Disposal
– of coolant 219
– remote control battery 37
– vehicle battery 232
Distance, refer to
Computer 72
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 74
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 72
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 82
Door key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 28
Door lock 32
Door lock, confirmation
signals 30
Doors, manual operation 32
DOT Quality Grades 212
Draft-free ventilation 102
Drinks holders, refer to
Cupholders 108
Drive mode 63
Drive-off assistance, refer to
DSC 83
Drive-off assistant 84
Driving dynamics control 64
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 94
Driving notes 116
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 84
Driving stability control
systems 83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
258
Driving through water 118
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 116
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 101
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 83
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 84
– indicator lamps 84
DVD
– country codes 157
– settings 158
– video playback 157
DVD menu 158
DVD player, refer to CD
player 155
DVD video 157
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 83
Dynamic destination
guidance 140
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 83
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 84
– indicator lamps 84
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 83
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD/DVD player 144
Electrical defect
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 65
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 32
– fuel filler flap 206
– glass roof 40
Electronic brake-force
distribution EBV 83
Electronic oil level check 217
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 83
Email 192
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– fuel filler flap 206
– glass roof 40
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 61
Emergency release, trunk
lid 34
Emergency Request 234
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 234
Energy, saving
– saving fuel 116
Engine
– breaking in 116
– data 242
– speed 242
– starting 58
– starting, Comfort Access 35
– switching off 58
Engine compartment 217
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 219
Engine oil
– adding 219
– additives 219
– alternative oil types 219
– approved engine oils 219
– BMW Maintenance
System 221
– checking level 217
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 74
Engine oil level, checking 217
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 242
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 242
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 58
Entering the postal code for
navigation 126
Entry map for destination 130
Equalizer, tone setting 145
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 83
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 117
Exterior mirrors 51
– adjusting 51
– automatic dimming
feature 52
– automatic heating 52
– folding in and out 51
External devices
– random play sequence 168
– software update 172
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 236
– for tying down loads 120
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 78
Failure of an electrical
consumer 232
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 35
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 50
Fastest route for
navigation 134
Fast forward
– CD changer 157
– CD player 157
Filter of automatic climate
control, refer to Microfilter/
activated charcoal filter 102
First aid pouch 235
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 57
Flash when locking/
unlocking 30
Flat tire
– run-flat tires 214
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 86
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84
– indicating a flat tire 85
– initializing the system 85
– system limits 84
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
259
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
FM, waveband 147
Fog lamps 97
– indicator lamp 13, 97
Footwell lamps 98
For your own safety 5
Free memory capacity, music
collection 164
Front airbags 90
Front seat adjustment 46
Frost on windows, refer to
Defrosting windows 101
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
Fuel 207
– gauge 71
– high-quality brands 207
– quality 207
– specifications 207
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 246
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 71
Fuel consumption indicator,
refer to Average fuel
consumption 72
Fuel consumption statistics,
refer to Average fuel
consumption 72
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 71
Fuel filler flap 206
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 206
Fuses 232
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 104
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 207
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 71
Gas station
recommendations 136
Gear display, with automatic
transmission 60
Gear shifting
– automatic transmission 60
– manual transmission 59
Gearshift lever 62
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– manual transmission 59
General driving notes 117
Glass roof, electric 39
– closing after electrical
malfunction 40
– convenient opening and
closing 32
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 36
– opening, closing 39
– pinch protection system 39
– remote control 30
– tilting 39
Glove compartment 107
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 124
Grills, refer to Air vents 99
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 245
H
Halogen lamps
– replacing bulbs 228
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 59
Hands-free system 184
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone for hands-free
mode 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
HD Radio 148
Head airbags 90
Headlamp control,
automatic 94
Headlamp cover 228
Headlamp flasher 66
– indicator lamp 13
Headlamps
– replacing bulbs 228
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 95
Head restraints 48
Heated
– seats 50
– steering wheel 53
Heated mirrors 52
Heating
– mirrors 52
– seats 50
– steering wheel 53
Heating, rear window 101
Heating and ventilation 99
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 120
Height, refer to
Dimensions 243
Height adjustment
– steering wheel 52
High-beam Assistant 96
High beams 96
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 228
High beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to High-
beam Assistant 96
High-pressure
washer 223, 224
High water, refer to Driving
through water 118
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 134
Hills 118
Holders for cups 108
Hood 216
Hot exhaust system 117
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control 83
Hydroplaning 117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
260
I
IBOC, refer to HD Radio 148
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 70
Identification marks
– tire coding 212
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 81
– changing date and time 77
– changing language 81
– menu guidance 17
– operating principle 16
– status information 19
Ignition 57
– switched off 58
– switched on 57
Ignition key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 57
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 57
Ignition lock 57
Imprint 2
Incoming call 180
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 87
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 86
Initializing
– compass, refer to
Calibrating 107
– radio, refer to Station,
storing 147
– refer to Setting the time and
date 77
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 85
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 136
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument combination, refer
to Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 98
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 104
Interactive map 130
Interior lamps 98
– remote control 30
Interior motion sensor 35
Interior rearview mirror 52
– automatic dimming
feature 52
– compass 106
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 67
Intersection, entering,
navigation 126
iPod, connecting, refer to
AUX-IN port 166
iPod, connecting, refer to USB
audio interface 166
J
Jacking points 232
Jets, refer to Air vents 99
Jets, refer to Window washer
nozzles 68
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump-
starting 235
Jump-starting 235
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 28
Keyless go, refer to Comfort
Access 35
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 35
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 28
Keypad dialing 182
Kickdown 60
Knock control 207
L
Lamps
– Adaptive Light Control 95
– interior lighting 98
Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/
Low beams 94
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 227
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 120
Last destinations 128
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 55
Launch Control 66
Leather care 225
LED Light-emitting
diodes 227
Length, refer to
Dimensions 243
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 231
Light
– instrument lighting 98
– refer to High-beam
Assistant 96
Light-alloy wheels 225
Light control
– refer to High-beam
Assistant 96
Light-emitting diodes
LED 227
Lighter 109
– socket 109
Lighting
– lamps and bulbs 227
– of the instruments 98
– of vehicle, refer to Lamps 94
Light switch 94
Limit, refer to Speed limit 80
Load 119
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 120
Lock buttons of doors, refer to
Locking 33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
261
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 30
– from inside 33
– from outside 30
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 35
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Low beam control, refer to
High-beam Assistant 96
Low-beam headlamps 94
– automatic 94
– replacing bulbs 228
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 47
Luggage compartment, refer
to Cargo area
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 120
Lumbar support 47
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 215
Maintenance, refer to
– BMW Maintenance
System 221
– Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models or in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Maintenance system 221
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 78
Manual car wash 224
Manually unlocking parking
lock 65
Manual operation
– door lock 32
– fuel filler flap 206
– glass roof 40
– parking lock 65
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 61
Manual operation with
automatic transmission 61
Manual transmission 59
Map for navigation
– changing scale 137
– entering destination 130
Map view 136
Maximum cooling 100
Maximum speed
– for winter tires 215
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Messages 190
Messages from the Concierge
service 192
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter for automatic climate
control 102
Microphone for telephone 14
Mirror dimming feature 52
Mirrors 51
– automatic curb monitor 52
– exterior mirrors 51
– heating 52
– interior rearview mirror 52
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 180
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 176
– operation 180
– pairing 176
– suitable mobile phones 176
– unpairing 179
– What to do if… 179
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 108
Mobile phone, refer to
Telephone 176
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Mobile phone audio
interface
166
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 84
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to AUX-IN port 166
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to USB audio interface 166
Multi-channel playback 145
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 66
– refer to Wiper system 67
Music, managing 164
Music collection 161
– backup 165
– deleting 165
– random sequence 164
– restoring 165
Music player, connecting,
refer to AUX-IN port 166
Music player, connecting,
refer to USB audio
interface 166
Music search 162
My Info 192
N
Navigation
– starting destination
guidance after entering a
destination 126
– storing current position 127
– voice activation 131
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 136
Navigation data 124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
262
Navigation system 124
– address book 127
– bypassing a route
section 135
– continuing destination
guidance 134
– destination entry 125
– dynamic destination
guidance 140
– entering a destination by
voice 131
– entering a destination
manually 125
– frequently asked
questions 141
– gas station
recommendations 136
– planning a trip 132
– route list 135
– selecting destination via
map 130
– selecting route criteria 134
– special destinations 128
– starting destination
guidance 134
– terminating destination
guidance 134
– traffic bulletins 138
– voice instructions 136
– volume adjustment 136
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 48
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 108
Neutral 63
New tires 214
Next Service indicator, refer to
Condition Based Service
CBS 221
North-facing map 136
Notes 194
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 242
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for Onboard Diagnosis 222
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 207
Odometer 70
Office 188
– current office 188
– What to do if… 195
Oil, refer to Engine oil 217
Oil consumption 217
Oil level 217
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 232
Onboard vehicle tool kit 227
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 35
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
– using the door lock 32
– using the remote control 29
Options, selecting for
navigation 134
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets, refer to
Ventilation 102
Output, refer to Engine
data 242
Outside temperature
display 70
– changing unit of measure 74
– in computer 74
Outside temperature
warning 70
Overriding selector lever
lock 61
Overview
– radio control 144
P
Paintwork care 225
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 82
Park Distance Control PDC 82
Parked car ventilation 102
– preselecting switch-on
times 103
– switching on and off
directly 102
Parking
– vehicle 58
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 82
Parking brake 59
– indicator lamp 59
Parking lamps/low beams 94
– replacing bulbs 228
Parts and accessories, refer to
Your individual vehicle 5
Passenger side mirror tilt
function 52
Pathway lighting 95
Personal information, refer to
Office 188
Personal Profile 28
Phone numbers
– dialing 181
Phone reception level, refer to
Status information 19
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 39
– windows 38
Playing music 162
Polish 225
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 102
Power windows 37
Power windows, refer to
Windows 37
Pressure, tires 208
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 86
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Programmable memory
keys 21
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 39
– windows 38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
263
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First aid pouch 235
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 84
R
Radio
– controls 144
– HD Radio 148
– satellite radio 150
– selecting waveband 147
– storing stations 147
– switching on/off 144
– tone control 144
– volume 144
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 57
Radio readiness 57
– switched off 58
– switched on 57
Rain sensor 67
Random play sequence
– external devices 168
Random sequence
– music collection 164
Reading aloud 194
Reading lamps 98
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 230
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 48
– folding down backrests 109
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 51
Rear window defroster 101
Reception
– quality 148
– radio station 148
Recirculated air mode 101
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated air mode 101
Redialing 183
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 230
Refueling 206
Releasing
– hood 216
Remaining distance, refer to
Computer 72
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 72
Reminders 194
Remote control 28
– battery renewal 37
– Comfort Access 35
– garage door opener 104
– malfunctions 31, 36
– removing from the ignition
lock 57
– service data 221
– trunk lid 30
Remote control key, refer to
Integrated key/remote
control
28
Replacement fuses, refer to
Fuses 232
Replacement remote
control 28
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 227
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 214
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 71
Reservoir for washer
systems 68
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 146
Restraint systems, refer to
Safety belts 50
Restraint systems for
children 54
Retreaded tires 214
Reverse
– CD changer 157
– CD player 157
Reverse gear 63
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– manual transmission 59
Road map 136
Roadside
Assistance 199, 234
Roadside parking lamps 96
– replacing bulbs 228
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 74
Rollover protection system,
Convertible 92
– resetting 92
Roof load capacity 245
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 120
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 237
Rotary/pushbutton control,
refer to Controller 16
Route 134, 135
– bypassing sections 135
– changing 134, 135
– changing criteria 134
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 135
– map view 136
– selecting 134
Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions 136
Route map, refer to Map
view 136
Route section, changing 135
Route selection 134
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
flat tires 214
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 214
Run-flat tires 214, 215
– flat tire 85
– inflation pressure 208
– new tires 214
– remaining driving distance,
refer to Indication of a flat
tire 85
– tire replacement 214
Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat
tires 214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
264
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 51
Safety belts 50
– damage 51
– indicator lamp 51
– reminder 51
– sitting safely 45
Safety systems
– airbags 90
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 83
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 83
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 92
– safety belts 50
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 214
Satellite radio 150
– enabling or unsubscribing
from a channel 150
– favorites 152
– selecting channel 151
– storing channel 151
– timeshift 152
– Traffic Jump 153
Saving fuel 116
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 236
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 150
Seat and mirror memory 50
Seat belt reminder, refer to
'Fasten safety belts'
reminder 51
Seats 46
– heating 50
– sitting safely 45
Securing cargo 111, 112
Selecting new scale for
navigation 137
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 60
Selector lever positions 62
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 234
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 234
Service data in remote
control 221
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 221
Service Request 201
Service requirements 74
Service status 202
Settings
– clock, 12h/24h format 77
– date format 78
– DVD 158
– language 81
Settings for the map view 137
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times 103
Shifting 64
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 63
Shifting gears with automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 61
Shift into a drive position, refer
to selector lever
positions 62
Shiftlock, refer to Changing
selector lever positions 60
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 64
Short commands for the voice
activation system 247
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 134
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 156
– CD player 156
Side airbags 90
Side windows, refer to
Windows 37
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 45
– airbags 45
– safety belts 45
Ski bag 110
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 39
Slot for remote control 57
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 109
Snap-in adapter 176
– inserting/removing 186
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest 108
Snow chains 215
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 109
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
OBD 222
Software update 172
Sound, adjusting during audio
playback, refer to Tone
control 144
Sound output for
entertainment on/off 144
Spare fuses 232
Special destinations 128
Special destinations,
displaying 129
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 219
Specified engine oils, refer to
Approved engine oils 219
Speed
– for winter tires 215
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 80
Speedo, refer to
Speedometer 12
Speedometer 12
Speed Volume 145
Split screen content, refer to
Selecting the display for the
split screen content 20
Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch 62
– driving dynamics control 64
– kickdown 63
– Launch Control 66
– manually unlocking parking
lock 65
– neutral 63
– reverse gear 63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
265
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Sport program, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 61
Sport program with 7-gear
Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 63
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 83
Start/Stop button 57
– starting the engine 58
– switching off the engine 58
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 58
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump-starting 235
Starting the engine
– Start/Stop button 57
Start menu 17
State/province, for
navigation 125
Station, selecting
– radio 147
Status information on the
Control Display 19
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 223, 224
Steering wheel 52
– adjustment 52
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 53
– shift paddles 64
Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 64
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 89
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 59
Storage 226
Storage compartment
package 108
Storage compartments 108
Stored trip, calling up 132
Storing
– seat position, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 50
– telephone numbers, refer to
separate Owner's Manual
Storing a destination in the
address book 127
Storing music 161
Storing tires 215
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 108
Street, entering,
navigation 126
Suitable mobile phones 176
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 208
Surround
145
SVCD 157
SW, waveband 147
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 58
Switching off the engine
– Start/Stop button 57
Switching on
– audio 144
– CD changer 144
– CD player 144
– radio 144
Switching the cooling function
on and off 101
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 103
Symbols 4
– status information 19
T
Tachometer 70
Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 33
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 230
– replacing bulb 231
Tail lamps 230
– replacing bulb 231
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 246
Tasks 193
Technical data 242
– dimensions 243
Technical modifications 5
Telephone 176
– hands-free system 184
– phone book 182
– received calls 183
– redialing 183
– voice commands 184
Telephone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 108
Telephone, refer to separate
Owner's Manual
Teleservice Diagnosis 200
Teleservice Help 200
Temperature display
– outside temperature 70
– outside temperature
warning 70
– setting the units 74
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 68
Text message 191
Thigh support 46
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 231
Three-point safety belt 50
Through-loading system 109
Tilt alarm sensor 35
Tilt function, passenger side
mirror 52
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 103
Tire inflation pressure 208
– loss 85, 87
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 84
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 86
– resetting the system 87
– system limitations 86
– warning lamp 87
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 85
Tire Quality Grading 212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
266
Tires
– age 212
– air loss 87
– breaking in 116
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 231
– condition 213
– damage 213
– inflation pressure 208
– labels 212
– minimum tread depth 213
– new tires 214
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 84
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 86
– puncture 85
– retreaded 214
– size 212
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 213
– winter tires 215
TMC station, refer to Traffic
bulletins 138
Tone
– control 144
– middle setting 146
Tools, refer to Onboard
vehicle tool kit 227
Top 50 of music
collection 163
Torque, refer to Engine
data 242
Tow bar 237
Tow fitting 236
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 236
Towing 236
– car with automatic
transmission 236
– methods 237
– with 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 237
Towing and tow-starting 236
Town/city, for navigation 125
Tow rope 237
Tow-starting 236
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 86
Track
– selecting on CD 155
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 83
Traffic bulletins
– categories 139
Traffic bulletins, filtering 139
Traffic bulletins for
navigation 138
– during destination
guidance 140
Traffic bulletins in navigation
– screen display in the map
view 139
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
bulletins 138
– refer to Route, bypassing
segments 135
Transmission
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 62
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– idle position 63
– Launch Control 66
– manually unlocking parking
lock 65
– manual transmission 59
– reverse gear 63
Transporting children
safely 54
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 120
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 213
Trip, deleting 133
Trip, storing 132
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 70
Triple turn signal activation 66
Trip odometer 70
Trips, changing 133
Trunk, refer to Cargo area
Trunk lid 33
– Comfort Access 36
– emergency release 34
– opening from outside 33
– unlocking with remote
control 30
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 243
Turn signal 66
– indicator lamp 12
Turn signals
– replacing bulbs 229
– triple turn signal 66
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 120
U
Underbody protection, refer to
Caring for your vehicle 223
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 212
Units
– average consumption 74
Units of measure
– temperature 74
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 104
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 29
Unlocking
– from inside 33
– from outside 29
– trunk lid 36
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 35
Unlocking without a key, refer
to Comfort Access 35
Updating the navigation
data 124
USB audio interface 166
Using contact data 194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Reference
267
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
V
VCD 157
Vehicle
– battery 232
– breaking in 116
– cargo loading 119
– decommissioning, refer to
Vehicle storage 226
– dimensions 243
– identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 217
– parking 58
– weight 245
Vehicle jack 232
Vehicle storage 226
Ventilation 102
– draft-free 102
Ventilation when parked, refer
to Parked car ventilation 102
Vents, refer to Ventilation 102
Video menu 157
Video playback 157
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice
instructions 136
Voice commands
– overview 23
– short commands 247
– telephone 184
Voice instructions from
navigation system 136
– repeating 136
– switching on/off 136
– volume 136
Voice phone book 185
Volume 144
– audio sources 144
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 246
– mobile phone 180
– voice instructions 136
Volume balance, tone
setting 145
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 78
Warning triangle 235
Washer fluid 68
– content of the reservoir 68
Washer fluid filler neck 68
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 109
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 118
Water penetration 223, 224
Waveband with the radio 147
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 213
Weights 245
Welcome lamps 94
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 243
Wheels, new 214
Wheels and tires 208
Width, refer to
Dimensions 243
Wind deflector 43
Windows 37
– convenient opening and
closing 30
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 36
– opening, closing 37
– pinch protection system 38
Window washer system 67
Windshield
– cleaning 67
– defrosting and removing
condensation 101
Windshield wash
– filling capacity, reservoir 246
Windshield washer reservoir,
refer to Washer fluid filler
neck 68
Windshield washer system
– spray nozzles 68
– washer fluid 68
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 227
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 67
Winter tires 215
– setting speed limit 80
– storage 215
Wiper blade replacement 227
Wiper system 67
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 227
X
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
01 40 2 606 818 ue iDrive
*BL260681800D*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 818 - © 03/11 BMW AG
